Winner XPlaneReviews BEST BUSINESS AIRCRAFT 2022 (and its only improved since first released in XP11)

The Director of Safety at one charter company at Boeing Field, Washington USA has been using the AirSim3D’s C-560XL and wrote this: 
“This jet is amazingly accurate.
The effort to build details and authenticity really shines through.
We are using this model to teach junior pilots advanced decision making and risk management, as well as chair-flying approaches to allow crews to build the familiarity and an understanding of timing needed to conduct safe operations in busy or unfamiliar terminal areas. I highly, highly recommended it.”

NOTE: If you have not yet purchased this product, and are wondering about how it looks and sounds, and want to see it “working”, then we invite you to view our YouTube channel, home for our C-560XL Tours and Tutorial videos. These provide unbiased, “just the facts” videos of the aircraft, filmed entirely in XP12, so you can decide for yourself whether this aircraft is right for you.
Tour#1 is a walk about of the outside of the aircraft.
Tour#2 does the same for the Inside Cockpit and Cabin.
We also have a full list of Tutorials released and planned with status. View that listing here.

If you are a C-560XL pilot, please bookmark this page.
Together with the aforementioned Tutorial Videos, you will need to refer to this document A LOT in the initial stages of flying as you become familiar with the aircraft.

Pilot Operations Handbook (POH)

CITATION C-560XL in XP11 and XP12

THIS POH LAST UPDATED: Nov 12 2024.

The AirSim3D C-560XL simulator model’s look, sounds, and functions are 95% authentic, 99.9% bug free, and it is a best-faith effort to replicate the real jet.
Consider this POH as the ONLY, and single source of truth for how-to operate the jet in X-Plane 11 or 12.

THE INFORMATION IN THIS POH IS PROVIDED AS-IS FOR FOR X-PLANE FLIGHT SIMULATION ENJOYMENT PURPOSES ONLY.
Said differently: It is NOT to be used as, or is a replacement for, any real-life aircraft flight training or instruction.
PLEASE NOTE: This document is living, and updated often. This means that over time, it might look and feel different as images and content is added or changed/updated in response to customer’s posting How-to questions asked in the X-Plane C-560XL forums, or as XP12 changes and adds new features and we keep up. (which are then colored as XP12 for easy visibility)
Consider this document, and the Tours and Tutorials on our YT channel, to be the only single sources of truth for this aircraft’s operations.

AIRCRAFT VERSIONS:

AS OF MARCH 15 2023, v1.0 was released for XP12.
The most recent releases for XP11 and XP12 can be found in your X-Plane.org store account:
LATEST C-560XL aircraft for XP11 is v2.0
LATEST C-560XL aircraft forXP12 is v2.1
There is a detailed PRODUCT CATALOG page here to help you decide which product offer best suits your needs.
Please do not try to copy XP11 versions into XP12 (or vise versa)
It is a violation of your end user license to do that, but that aside, it simply will not work, and worse, that fruitless action will use up one of your Product Key activation counts needlessly — which are not refundable.
So word to the wise, and for all the reasons above: Please do not try doing that.

INDEX:

* About the POH’s Design
* Asking for help
* Steps to install the jet after purchase, frequent causes of install failures
* Our YT channel for Visual learners
* Visual tour See images, locations, and descriptions of panel layouts and instrument locations
* Installation 1) Getting Ready 2) Steps (read 1 first!)
* Your first few hours with the aircraft as a pilot, or a reviewer
* Checklists: 1) Overview 2) Details 3) Text
* Manipulators (required reading!!)
* The Journey begins; setting expectations for a long, happy C-560XL flying career

LETS FLY:
         * Takeoff: is fairly straight forward
         * Climbing a realistic ascent /Climb profile to cruise altitude
         * Slipstream sounds queues
         * Landing
         * The Jet’s Centerline
         * Essential Switches and functions for general safety, planning and navigation (a linked list to 30 topics)

CUSTOM FLIGHT ENHANCEMENTS:
         * Real and Augmented Mode Panels
         * Auto Throttle

INSTRUMENTS:
         * Autopilot: 1) How-to Engage 2) The 8 custom functions
         * G1000
         * Setting Ref Speeds
         * Navigating: ADF, VOR APR/ILS HNAV, VNAV
         * PFD
         * Pop outs
         * EFIS Control Panel/Buttons/Power
         * Selecting VOR/GPS Sources for Navigation
         * Selecting VOR/GPS Direct-To Needles;
         * The 3 Big Buttons
         * MFD Control Panel
         * Terrain / WX Radar
         * Flight Directors
         * AP Status annunciators and their meaning in the PDF
         * Overspeed warning
         * Pitot, AOA heater
         * NO TAKEOFF warning
         * Stab Miscompare warning
         * 4 Handles beneath the Pilot-side Dashboard
         * AOA indexer Chevrons and Dots
         * Turn dial, Bank limit and Bank Angle
         * Fuse Panels
         * Preflight Rotary Test

YOKE
         * Hide, Using in VR, Buttons, TCS (Touch Control Steering)

ENGINES
         * Power and Detents
         * Reverser deploy, Stow 1) Overview 2) Operations
         * Start /Shutdown 1) Overview 2) Operations
         * Auto Throttle
         * Instruments
         * Engine gens
         * Fire

FUEL
         * Balancing: Crossfeed (X-Feed)

LIGHTING that includes:
         * Panel, Map, Floods, EL, Passenger safety,
         * Passenger safety, Emergency Exiting
         * Day/Night instrument brightness
         * Pulse TCAS and Landing, Normal Landing/Taxi
         * Nav, Strobes, Tail Recognition, Wing Inspection
         * Cabin, individual table and reading lights
         * Interior Cabin Master

SYSTEMS:
         * Connecting the Main battery (Outside)
         * Hydraulic System and failures
         * Electrical (Connecting/Disconnecting Main Battery, Emergency power)
         * Electrical generators 1) GPU 2) APU
         * Imbalance caused by running APU
         * APU Fire
         * Fuse Panels
         * Battery Over-temp
         * Master Warning and Caution
         * Annunciator Panel (42 windows, over 90 alerts)
         * Pressurization
         * Anti Ice
         * DME
         * Brakes, Rudder Bias
         * Flight path vector (FPV)
         * Cabin, Cockpit AC & Heating
         * ATC Com & Mic Panel, OMI markers
         * 4-Function, dual Clocks

COMMUNICATION:
         * Primary RMU
         * Standby Radio
         * Ident, Modes

DOORS & EXITS:
         * NOTE for XP11
         * Lav
         * Main
         * Baggage

EXTERNAL ELEMENTS:
         * Chocks, cones, covers, Pilots in cockpit
         * Cabin things to do

ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
         * Details: Colors, Interpretation and Resolution
         * Guide: 42 warnings / resolutions explained

Jet Specifications, Maneuvers and Procedures Reference

Checklists Text

Definitions





ABOUT THE POH’s DESIGN:

Seeing that this is not in a “traditional” PDF format, you might be wondering:
         1 Why is this POH so colorful?
         2 Why is it so dense, and detailed?
         3 Reading is not my preferred learning style. Where is the summary?
         4 Where is the PDF version of this?

1) The colors serve a serious purpose.
Read answers in the “ABOUT THE POH” section of the FAQ
Color index:
         HyperLinks +mouseover Bold
         Must read, critical
         Highlights, Topic Titles, In-jet LABELs
         Voice of the customer verbatims
         XP12 specific content
         Contextual Highlights
         Text/Content

2) The real manual is over 300 pages thick! We have tried to condense it, but, more importantly, it is detailed to empower you with on-demand answers so that you DO NOT have to rely on us for support or answers.
Of course, we are on the support site and always ready to help, but we thought you might enjoy learning at your own pace, and with no dependencies on us to answer any questions you may have.

3) If reading is not your preferred learning style, there are a full range of Video tutorials you can choose to watch.
Please go here to our Informational and Tutorial videos summary page on our x-plane.org C-560XL Support site to get a full list, tutorial status, and links to all our visual content.
All video tutorials are posted toour AirSim3D YT channel

But back to the POH — It would be silly of us to imagine or expect that everyone, will read every word, about everything, in this POH! :))
Please know that we DO NOT require, or even expected you to read this POH end to end.
But to fly this 95% replica and 99.9% bug free jet reliably, consistently, with no frustration, and for hours of model immersion and flying enjoyment, you will need to spend some time studying its basics.
To do that we recommend at a minimum reading up until the end of the interactive POH INDEX section to cover the basics, but then after that use your browser’s page-FIND function to quickly get to the content you need. Search for the same LABELS you find in the jet.

4) There is no PDF version. provided. And there are no plans to provide one either.
Why?
a) You can save this page as a PDF yourself, but be aware that it will be almost 100 pages long!
b) You can also print it yourself if you wish, but, we do not recommend that simply because we update this document often, and your printed copy will be out of date very soon.

THE PLACE TO ASK QUESTIONS TO BRIDGE POH UNDERSTANDING GAPS:
Please visit the support forum here: X-Plane C-560XL forums if you need help, or if you find things not adequately explained in this doc, or if you find anything missing.
We are here to help, but please do the due diligence to first search for answers yourself on this page using your browsers SEARCH/PAGE FIND function, since we’ve tried (and will continue to do so) to make this POH as complete and self-serving as possible.
We like having personal conversations, and so this document is written with YOU, the sim pilot in mind, speaking to you in a casual voice referring directly to You, and to the jet as “the jet”.


“Are there Video tutorials I can look at instead?”
Yes. Please visit our YouTube channel.
We drop these as they are created; planned releases and details are listed here.

This POH assumes you have installed the aircraft in your XP application, and can see and hear the jet running and working in X-Plane 11 or XP12.
Please read the topic: INSTALLATION immediately if you are not past that stage.
Please visit the Support Forums as needed for any help needed.

INSTALLATION:
If you have purchased and downloaded the Jet from the X-PLANE.ORG store, and need next steps to install the aircraft (nothing special for those who have done this for other XP aircraft) read this section.
If you already have the jet up and running … read on.

There are differences between the XP11 and XP12 versions of the jet.
When reading this POH, assume that something is available in BOTH sim versions UNLESS its specifically called out with this label: XP12
The reason for the differences is simply that X-Plane 12 made changes to its flight model (better), visual rendering, and added many features and functions — which we of course added to the jet to make it XP12 Ready, but are not available in XP11 — for example, there is no rain visible in the XP11 version, but rain can be seen default and out-of-the-box in the XP12 version.

YOUR FIRST TIME WITH THE AIRCRAFT, as a pilot, or as a reviewer:

BEFORE YOU BEGIN FLYING THE JET, A WORD TO THE WISE for a great C-560XL flying experience
The C-560XL is study-level, and all things considered, it is upwards of 95% replicated. And it is 99.9% bug free, so everything “just works”.
its also the reason we don’t have “regular updates” since you get a “completed” aircraft from the onset. We DO produce updates, but that’s mainly for XP12 to keep pace with the changes the sim makes as new versions of it are released.

We should also mention that the aircraft is not your usual, pristine, “clean-looking” aircraft. it contains grunge, dirt, smudges, scratches — all like we noticed on the aircraft in real-life.
Often these have been mistakenly called out as “bad textures”. No. The smudges and stains and scratches you see is intentional added grungy, realism-added artwork. Be assured, all our textures are 2K at a minimum, so everything is sharp as it should be.

Now, you may have an opinion on what “study level” means to you, but here is what that means to us (read the “Is this study-level” topic in the FAQ)
This jet’s systems and functions, design, animations, etc., etc., all look, feel and sound like the real jet. (Because its development was informed by real pilots, and we made sound recordings and photographed it from all angles for accuracy and authenticity)

With that study level expectation set, you will need to invest some time to learn a few critical things for hours of predictable and enjoyable flights.
This also means, and we STRONGLY ADVISED against doing this: That you DO NOT just ‘jump in” and try to start cold and dark right away!! OR make assumptions about how things “should work” based on your many hours of experience with what you are used to doing “in other aircraft”. If you take this approach, you will be guaranteed to set yourself up to be frustrated, to get angry, and to think the jet full of bugs — when it has been trough extensive testing and we can confidently say that it is in fact 99.9% bug free.
This “please learn before you do” plea from us to you becomes especially critical if you are performing Online Live streaming, or permanent YT-posted reviews of the C-560XL.
We ask you to please be fair and LEARN how the jet operates before flying it for your audience.
You owe YOUR audience that much at a minimum, and frankly to us too, just as a matter of courtesy and being fair and unbiased.
One of our most frustrating things for us as is to watch a reviewer give a negative “influencer/expert-opinion” about “bad textures” (without also highlighting that’s advanced 3D grunge) or fumble about and not be able to do something just because they did not learn, or take the time to do the homework or practice that’s needed to familiarize themselves with how the jet is designed to operate, or to see them fumble around trying to do things that are out of order in the checklists so things don’t work, all while lamenting that it does not work!! — to cause the audience to incorrectly draws conclusions that this jet is “full of bugs”.

Those are categorically false and unfair judgements about the jets 95% authenticity, or its 99.9% bug-free quality. Please hold yourself accountable to be knowledgeable and fair. That’s all we ask.

PLEASE reach out to us on our Support page to ask for help — happy to do that.
We are absolutely open to constructive, fact-based feedback.
This jet was BUILT by listening to feedback from real pilots, testers, UE studies, and our community of customers.

Yes, you will find similarities with basic things like the stick movement for the aircraft in the same way all aircraft fly, but this aircraft’s systems and functions replicate the real jet to 95%, and unless you are already a C-560XL pilot, you will need to learn how Cessna designed this jet.

True, there are some things that are not exactly the same — like the addition of a convenient, but totally unrealistic AUGMENTED MODE panel layout that also gives you an AUTO THROTTLE — which the real jet does not have, but, generally speaking and for 95% of the time, the jet will function and behave like the real thing, and in a VERY HIGH number of critical functions that matter to the flight and visual experience, you will find a 100% match.

We also recommend that in the early stages, you turn the Sim’s “View/ Show Instrument Click Regions” ON as you get familiar with where everything is, because, unlike what you may have experience with in other jets that have a lot of “space” between instruments, this jet is cramped, has many switches, dials, and some really small buttons!!
Please read this related topic about the many X-Plane Manipulators and the 2 things you can do to have a good button-push experience

Therefore, please, please, please invest the time to learn the jets systems and functions … there, have we said it enough times now :))
— The learning journey should be a part of your overall flight experience goal!

Although it is complex, once learned, everything what Cessna designed into its jet becomes quite intuitive, and it gets really fun and easy to fly — just like the real thing.
So it will therefore take time and repetition for things and events to become second nature and to appreciate that the jet is 95% replicated, 99.9% bug free, and has a simple design beauty and elegance (which was a driving factor for us to build this model to begin with)

 I really do love the way the aircraft flies soooooo smooth.
Everything works as intended.
You really do need to carefully read the manual — I turned the pressurization panel past 50 and didn’t know its FL550 haha passed out.
Lesson learned.

A customer comment in the Support Forum

FIRST TIME PILOTS… READ ME FIRST:
It is STRONGLY RECOMMENDED when you are starting out to start your Journey with engines running for the first couple of hours of your C-560Xl experience.
Check the Hobbs airframe-use counter window on the Co-Pilot side-panel, above the APU panel. It cumulatively records the time you spend in the aircraft each time the aircraft is in use.
Doing this will allow you to familiarize yourself with jet functions and where everything is by following the checklists, to then confidently get to the more complicated things like starting from cold and dark.
AS TEMPTING AS IT MAY BE, PLEASE AVOID the impulse to “jump right in” and start clicking and pushing things to try to start from a cold and dark state from the X-Plane config menu.
This aircraft will bite you if you start making assumptions about how you think things “should” work.
WHY!??
Well, despite how good or experienced a sim pilot you may be, or how many other aircraft you may have experience with, you have PROBABLY never flown a C-560XL.
And as this is a study-level, 95% replica of the real thing, details matter.
And you need to first know what terms mean and where to find things first.
Read what that Study-Level means to us (“Is this study-level” in the FAQ)

Trust us in this matter of setting aside C&D for a bit:
It is in YOUR interest to avoid becoming frustrated and thinking things do not work.
Instead of trying the precision-riddled, must-follow-exact-steps, and time-consuming (but rewarding experience) of the cold and dark starting procedure (that all real pilots go through every time that fly), first familiarize yourself with how this jet operates.

This JET IS DIFFERENT.

Said one customer in the forums: “You (are) absolutely right about this jet being different from other aircraft, cause it is…..I spent 3hrs trying to figure out how to setup this aircraft from cold n dark state without reading the POH” . The customer was happy to eventually figure it out by himself, but, he reported taking 3 hours to do that?!!?? YIKES!
You will get you there faster, and with a LOT less aggravation, if you please, please, please read and reference this POH often. You DO NOT NEED TO READ IT end to end (if that is not your style) — USE PAGE SEARCH.

If you heed this advice to begin methodically and start with engines running for the first couple of flights to first get acquainted with everything, then please go here.
However, if you disregard this advice, and just have to start cold and dark, or better, once you have a couple of hours experience, then you need to:
1) Load the aircraft to a cold and dark state. This ensures that ALL systems are offline.
         1a) If you simply load with the sim’s “engines running” checked OFF, and you still see a lighted dashboard, this is NOT a bug, but rather, read this COLD AND DARK START section (then return back up here) to understand why you are not ready for a C&D start, and you can take necessary steps. Return here ONLY after the aircraft is TRULY COLD AND DARK (C&D) — NOTHING should be on, or running/working. How to set this up correctly is also on our YouTube channel. There are 2 parts to the C&D setup, each has its tutorial.
2) Once the cockpit and aircraft is verifiably C&D, only then…
         2a) Go outside to the battery compartment labeled: BATTERY DISCONNECT, found just aft of the Port wing root. If you are in XP11 you will need to “drift” outside from an internal camera view to the compartment. You will not see the manipulators using an outside camera view. That’s just an XP11 Design. In XP12 LR fixed this and you can see manipulators in outside camera views. Go here for more about X-Plane Manipulator behavior. We cover this in our YouTube tutorials also.
         2c) Click the leads to connect the battery, close the compartment
         2d) Go back into the cockpit. (if you forget to close it you will see a warning annunciator once started) Umm… do not fly with it left open.
         2e) If you are in XP11, and can not open the Compartment, read the “Vulcan” notes in the COLD AND DARK Section (XP12is always Vulcan — but this changes as their Beta changes.)
3) Turn GEN L & R, Battery, Avionics switches OFF in the DC POWER panel section
4) Check the left side panel, under the top big red switch cover labeled BATTERY DISCONNECT; the Switch should be ON (Down); The INTERIOR MASTER switch under it likewise ON (or no cabin lighting)
5) Back to the dash… in this order:
         5a) Turn the DC POWER BATT ON switch to On
         5b) AVIONICS POWER switch ON. In XP12, take a minute to stop and hear the avionics start/warm up!! — real jet recording!
6) Instruments will be on, EXCEPT the PFD and the MFD will have no power at this stage. This is not a bug. You will need to power them up.
7) The Pilot and Co Pilot PFDs each have their own separate power dials, the MFD has 1 power dial.
         7a) If using the AUGMENTED mode Panel, look at the Center Console/Pedestal for the EFIS control panel.
         7b) If using the REALISTIC mode Panel look for the EFIS control panel on the front dash port of the PFD. More on the REAL, AUGMENTED mode Panel Layouts here. We cover Panel layouts in our YouTube tutorials also.
8) Turn PFD power on for the Pilot and CP PFD’s:
         Use the EFIS control panel, and its location will depend on whether you are using the REAL, AUGMENTED mode Panel Layout.
         The EFIS control panel will display either on the front dashboard (REALISTIC mode) or on the Center Console/Pedestal (AUGMENTED mode)
         8a) If in AUGMENTED MODE, look on the Center console/Pedestal, and turn the Pilot PFD power on by turning the little dial on the top panel of the left side, labeled ON, OFF (TEST on the top surface of the dial), turn ON. The Pilot side PFD will now have power. Do the same for the CP side PFD by using the similar dial but now on the CP side of the Center Console/Pedestal.
         8b) If in REALISTIC MODE the panel will be positioned on the front dashboard and you will turn the Pilot PFD power on by turning the little dial on the top panel on the left side, labeled ON, OFF (TEST on the top surface of the dial). Turn it ON. Do the same using the Button on the the Center Console/Pedestal on the CP-side, to turn the power ON for the CP-side PFD.
          8c) These PFD power dials are also used to conduct the EFIS TEST (Press them in turn) as mentioned called for later on in the checklists.
9) Finally power the MFD power ON by using the MFD CONTROL PANEL found on the Center Console/Pedestal, on the Co Pilots side of it, bottom panel aft dial. Look for the dial labeled with the options — OFF, SG1, NORM, and SG2. — turn to NORM. This powers the MFD instrument on the front dashboard.
“SG1 & SG2” are not power settings options (normal to think that since they are on the power dial). They are 2 “Symbol Generator” backups for the PFD — so in case the Symbols in the PFD conk out, the pilot has 2 backup generators to restore them. This is not modeled in the aircraft.
11) You are now ready to start the jet.
         To do this you need the Checklists.
         Where are they?
         11a) Click the NORM button on the MFD.
         11b) POP THE PANEL OUT by clicking the MFD face! This is not mandatory, but always a good practice when running checklists because:
         11c) If you change the Battery position to EMER (during an emergency or when conducting checklist tests) the MFD IS SHUT OFF by design to conserve power, and you will not be able to see the checklists.
         As long as the MFD power switch is on, irrespective of the Battery switch position, a popped out Checklist WILL ALWAYS show the checklists.
         So, good practice to always pop out checklists.
12) WARNING: You must run through the CHECKLISTS. Starting with the PREFLIGHT section DO NOT jump straight to the STARTING section!! The jet is not yet ready to be started.
         Why not?
         This is a 95% replica.
Systems need to be set up in a precise order — like real pilots do when starting the C-560XL. You .
         Therefore, please go through the Checklist sections IN ORDER, beginning from the PREFLIGHT Section.
         Being methodical ensures that everything is ready for an eventual engine start, and some steps to have that successfully happen are in checklists sections that are PRIOR to the “STARTING” stage.
         Be VERY precise and methodical in your approach to starting the aircraft from a cold and dark state, like all real pilot are. It works.
If it does not, its 99.9% probable that you have not done what the jet requires.


CHECKLISTS
Summary: The jet provides 14 REAL-jet, exactly worded checklists, and a total of 23 sub pages. These are built into the MFD which real pilots follow across all stages of the flight.
The checklists are accessed from the MFD’s Button Labeled: NORM (for Normal checklists).
Sim-pilots looking for an authentic experience should use these checklists to avoid frustration, wasting time, and to avoid questions like “why doesn’t Fill-In-the-Blank work!!”

Accessing Checklists / Checklist location
Depending on whether you are using XP11 or XP12, Access to the checklist will be available at different times during a cold and dark setup.
There is an extensive “checklists” tutorial on our AirSim3D official YouTube channel. Please review Checklist Tutorials 1.1 and 1.2 for details.
If the aircraft is up and running, and all systems are working, click the NORM button.
The checklists may be popped out, resized, or repositioned.
If the aircraft is in a Cold and Dark state, with nothing on, even if the outside battery is not connected, Turn the MFD power dial (center console, second panel down) to NORM
Then Click the NORM button to get access to the checklists.
If starting from cold and dark begin with PREFLIGHT, NOT the STARTING Checklist.

Using Checklists
A checklist’s content is displayed by SCROLLING (NOT clicking) on one of the flight phases CHECKLISTS TITLES in the top strip
Once you see content (1/3 means you are on the first of 3 pages), THEN CONTINUE TO SCROLL with the mouse placed on the flight phase (now underlined too) to scroll and page through the content.
You MUST scroll though ALL current flight phase topic pages to get to a blank page, and only then will you be able to open any other flight-phase topic.
If checklists are displayed, it will cover other MFD screens being used at the time the NORM is called in the MFD, by design.

See also, related topic about Checklist behaviors here.
Here is a complete list of the checklists in txt format.

Distribution or reuse of the AIRSIM3D’s C-560XL checklists presented in this site, in whatever form or format, and at any location is not permitted without AirSim3D’s expressed and written consent.

MANIPULATORS (also referred to here in this POH as MANIPS as a short-form label)
Manipulators/Manips are a means to interact with the aircraft parts — like moving a switch, turning a dial moving things like Yokes, throttles, etc.
Not everything can (or should) be “manipulated”, unless designed to do so.
So how would you know if something is designed to be “manipulated” — and therefore to have it “do” something?
If you turn Show click regions to ON in the Sim View menu dropdown, Manipulators then display as semitransparent green objects.
You will interact with these areas to “do work” — like flip switches, push buttons, scroll wheels, grab and move throttles. etc. etc.
If you are moving something, you are using a manip.
Generally, if you mouse over a manip the cursor will change to show you the direction the object will move. And moving the cursor either vertically or horizontally over the manipulator will change its shape.
As an example: A switch can move vertically up or down, and the cursor will change to an up arrow on the top half of the manipulator, and point downward on the lower half to move the switch down. Similarly, dial manip shapes will change to a Left or Right curved arrow, but also change size from small and large if there are multiple-sized dials stacked in the same place.
So why is all of this important?
Manipulator SIZE matters.
The smaller a manipulator is, the more important it becomes to be precise about where the cursor is placed, to use it correctly.
By design, this jet has many small moving objects, all in close proximity to one another.
Therefore, the SIZE of the manips for these objects are naturally constrained to the space available to “cover” the object to help you move and interact with just that single object it is designed to move.
This is ESPECIALLY true when objects that need to be manipulated are close together, and even more so when close things are ALSO small, like, all the small buttons that you would “push” with a Hand or Arrow — places like Starter buttons, or any of the buttons on the RMU, or EFIS control panels, AP … etc.
Since the Manipulators to click these small dials and buttons need to be sized to the button’s or dial’s dimensions, by design, each of those manips WILL ALSO BE SMALL in size.
We can not “make the manipulators bigger”, or even “move them so its easier to interact then” when viewed from different angles, because then they would obviously overlap and that leads to all sorts of negative user-experiences.
Therefore, the Manipulator’s size and position/location WILL MATCH the Button’s/switch’s size and position/location – whatever its size.

With that context, you may find that if you poke a button with the finger of the Manipulator icon, and nothing happens.
This is not a bug.
You are instead simply running into a quirk of X-Plane’s manipulator design (we have nothing to do with this), and making small manips click can sometimes get tricky.
BUT here are 2 things you can do to have a GOOD BUTTON-PUSH MANIPULATOR EXPERIENCE:
         1) Resist the temptation to zoom in to see the buttons to make them look bigger. Its not necessary given #2 solution below. But if you do zoom in, then click more to the opposing corners of the button to activate them — L, R or Top/Bottom half — which will work will depend on the buttons design AND your viewing angle.
         2) If in normal view, you are probably poking the button by placing the “finger” on the button, and clicking to press it, and getting frustrated that the button does not work.
The assumption of using the pointed finger to do the work is natural because of X-Plane’s “hand” icon design.
But, instead of poking it with the finger, try to instead “palm” the button by placing the entire palm of the hand icon on the button .. even if its finger-part is sticking out/off the button frame … then press/click it (or better, scroll the mouse wheel). If that does not work, move the palm slightly to either the L or the R, or the top or bottom of the button, and then click/scroll to get the button to “trigger”.

This all may sound like a weird solution, but trust us it works, and if you must know, its largely due to the way LR designed the hand manipulator to work — its center does the work, not the finger part, and on small buttons and click areas like we have in the C-560XL (that’s is the basic jet’s design, nothing we can do about how Cessna designed it — we just follow), the click-center is the “palm”, not the finger, so you need to palm the button, not poke your finger at it :))

Using manips when in outside Camera modes:
A design feature in XP11 is that manips are not viewable when using one of the sims “outside” camera views — like CHASE as an example.
This has nothing to do with the aircraft, and is not a bug.
This means that if you need to visit the outside battery compartment as an example, where the manipulator is on the outside of the aircraft, you MUST use one of the internal/cockpit camera view, and then “drift” through the fuselage wall to the outside of the aircraft, move down to the port-side wing-root area where the panel is located, (look for the BATTERY COMPARTMENT label) and then you will be able to interact with it.
LR fixed this in XP12 so you no longer need to drift outside while using an internal camera view, but instead, manips are viewable and useable when using an either inside or outside camera views.

ENGINE POWER & THROTTLE DETENTS:
As was noticed in the XPLANE REVIEWS, the C-560XL has a lot of power, (5:1 more than the A380 as an example) and so it is very easy to overpower the jet.
Unlike big heavy airliners or military jets, where it is fashionable to slam the throttles forward-full-gas, resist/DO NOT do that in the C-560XL.
Slamming the jet full on is ONLY for life-threatening emergencies in the real jet. And running them at that for more than 1 minute starts to impact engine perf. (So be the opposite of Nike: Just don’t do it)
There is no need since the aircraft is designed to be light, and fast.
And that is NOT how real 560XL pilots take off anyway. The Jet does NOT need a lot of power to get moving to get airborne.  It is perfectly normal to TAKE OFF (TO) with ~80-85% N1 so as to both extend engine life, and to have climb-out speed and events happen at a more measured and manageable pace.
As a matter of fact, when you lift off, gear up, 100 nose high, you will find the “E” for egress-speed-marker on the speed-tape come up quite quickly and you WILL need to throttle back a bunch to not overspeed the jet past that critical Airspeed checkpoint. In the USA the FAA will come down on you if you fly >160 in a TCZ. So slow down hoss!
Also, the closer you get to the 200kts max speed flaps and gear threshold with either or both of them down, the louder the outside slipstream gets!
So if you heard loud roaring, that’s not a Lion in the cabin, you are flying too fast for the aircraft’s configuration.

Be gentle, intentional, and deliberate about using the throttles for the power you need, for the phase of the flight you are in.
Note also, TAKE OFF, CLIMBING, CRUISE is NOT done exclusively and only when the throttles are in the TAKE OFF, CLIMB or CRUISE detents as displayed on the throttle stack, or TO, CLB, CRU indicated on the little THROTTLE DETENT INSTRUMENT on the dash. (left of Pilot PFD). The amount of throttle-power used should always be a decision that YOU, the Pilot-In-Command (PIC) makes, based on flight and aircraft config; set the throttle to and where it NEEDS to be, based on your desired climb rate, while taking into consideration your flight weight, speed, attitude, weather, or altitude.

Practice climbing to cruise altitudes using a realistic Ascent power profile.

THE JOURNEY BEGINS:

If you are in the early stages of your C-560XL flying experience, and have chosen to start the jet with engines running as we suggested above, then Bravo!
On Load, you will think you have found your first problem: the aircraft loads with no sound!
But patience grasshopper, after ~10 seconds FMOD will complete loading its custom sounds, and the aircraft is/should be sounding great and running at idle.

WHAT IF YOU FIND THINGS ARE NOT WORKING “like other jets I have flown do”?
Each aircraft is different, so please set aside assumptions that “this aircraft should work like those”.
Frankly, there are some we’ve seen that have taken shortcuts to simplify things, but that’s not realistic.
We try to maintain 95% realism in everything about this aircraft.
This is a 99.9% bug free aircraft.
Both XP11 and XP12 versions of the aircraft has been through extensive, months long testing. We took our time (even delaying) the initial launch of both XP11 and XP12 versions by months because we at AirSim3D do not believe that paying customers should be treated as Beta Testers. No knock on others, but that’s just not us.

Therefore be guaranteed that, because of those MONTHS of rigorous beta testing, we have very high confidence that all system work as designed.
If something is not working, its is most likely because (and forgive us for being blunt here)
         a) You are incorrectly assuming that something should work in a certain way when it does not work that way in this jet (or it does so differently).
         b) A required procedure is not being executed precisely — precisely being the operative work here — this jet is replicated to 95%, so you are expected to follow the exact steps that pilots follow. There are no shortcuts, by design.
The resolution is to please always refer to, and use the checklists and this POH as your guides to endless hours of fun-flying!
SEARCH (use your browsers Page-FIND function on most browsers) for the topic of interest — use the LABELS in the jet as keywords.
Could you find a bug? .. sure. Nothing is perfect. But we can assure you that IF you do find one we can reliably reproduce, then WE will address it swiftly (as we did in the early stages of its development). 
Requests for new things are always welcomed and will be triaged from a customer experience perspective for fix-prioritization.
And if somethings not clear please don’t hesitate to reach out to the team in the X-Plane C-560XL forums — we are here to help.

One final thing before we begin instructions: As you are aware, XP11 is now in its end-of life period — after 5 versions, we say good buy to it in favor of the latest XP12 version.
Therefore, while we continue to support our XP11 jet-version, do not expect any new features or functions to be added to it. Its 99.9% bug free anyway.
We WILL continue to add features and functions to keep sync with XP12 as they are released by the LR team.
So, unless you plan to stay with XP11 for ever, please consider purchasing the XP12 version (or the Bundled version that gives you the XP11 and 12 jet versions at a discount)

LET’S FLY!

Takeoff: is fairly straight forward

1) For this we need to assume you have completed a number of things:
         a) Checklists were followed/done (or you started the aircraft as we advised, “with engines running”), then the jet should be ready to go with all its systems running
         b) All you see should see is a WHITE GND IDLE annunciator (Ground Idle), on the large up front annunciator panel when the throttles are at idle
         c) You are positioned on, or taxied to, a runway somewhere
         d) You have enough fuel (use the sim’s EDIT WEIGHT AND BALANCE menu) 1/2 tanks and 1/2 payload are recommended for beginner flights
         e) Weather is good — avoid the more complex-flying, higher-level-skill-required crosswinds/tailwinds take offs for now
         f) You have ATC clearance if you are using it (although we recommend you avoid it for now since it could be a distraction at this early learning stage)
         g) The Engines are purring at idle, N1 should be mid 30%
         h) Critically as a reminder, Pressurization and Sources are set correctly so you don’t pass out from Hypoxia if you decide to fly higher than 10,000 ft. on your first flights
         i) Critically as a reminder, you have accounted for Icing conditions if present. The time to mitigate that risk from that of crashing and dying is on the ground, before you take off. (Follow the checklists and you will be fine)
— if all of this is checked, you are ready for take off.

You should never begin a TAKE OFF with anything but Ground Idle annunciation — which will go off once you begin to rev the engines a bit past idle.
The Annunciator panel, MC, MW — all should be off, (a dark and quiet panel) for safe flying.

2) Next, (if not already done) set the N1 Bug using the spring-loaded dial found above the Stand By Radio Management Unit. Usually 80-85% is an adequate N1 target at Sea level, or 90% if the RWY is short, or if the aircraft is heavy, or at high ALT airports. See why ~80-85% N1 power is the recommendation, above.
3) Quick check… is the StabMisc warning annunciator still lighted? Read this section
4) Parking/Emergency Brakes off and Control Lock handle IN.
         There is no annunciator in this jet for Regular/Emergency Parking Brakes or Control lock status
5) Throttle up (gently!!) to the N1 bug set previously in #2 above. There is no AUTO THROTTLE (in REALISTIC mode only) . AT should be turned on only once you are in the air.
         a) Watch the small THROTTLE DETENT INSTRUMENT that’s positioned top left of the Pilot/Port-side PFD to know what indent the throttle are at without having to look down at the Center Console/Pedestal Throttle Quadrant.
         b ) It is not mandatory to set the throttle to the detents to Take Off (TO), Climb (CLB), Cruise (CRU)etc. to in fact, TO, CLB or CRU! Factors such as altitude, current speed, configuration, weather, and weight all influence how much power is needed for the phase of the flight you are in. Remember You are the Pilot In Command…so FLY the jet as it needs to be flown in the moment
         c) IN XP12: the throttles will redline if slammed forward, or, if set too high, or at high settings in warmer ambient temps.
DO NOT REDLINE THE THROTTLES. The aircraft has a 5:1 greater power-to-weight ratio and it is not a heavy airliner, or one of the other biz jets modelled to require full power for TO. So it therefore does NOT need the throttles full-gas for TO! (for emergencies only, and the Aircraft will Zoom with the enormous power it has… its one area where Cessna did not skimp in this jet) You will burn the engines up! TO is modeled to fly realistically. Power should only be to the aforementioned N1 bug setting only.
To fix, throttle back to get out of Red. Your engines will thank you.
Once achieved (using lower power settings) higher airspeeds also allow more air into the engines to cool the engine ITT’s, so learn to always accelerate “in the white” … that is the right way to fly the jet. (but for fun, redline the temps at night and watch the instruments glow!)
6) Remain RWY-line centered with the use of the Rudder pedals — make small movements — look far ahead down the RWY, not at the nose. (See also The JET’s CENTERLINE for how-to-keep-it-centered guidance)
7) Rotate gently at R on speed tape, smoothly continue to pitch up to +10 degrees nose up max (if you do not see R, the jet is not set up for TO correctly — Flaps probably not set correctly — please follow the checklists)
8) At positive climb rate:
         a) Tap brakes to stop wheel spin
         b) Gear up (never extended above 220Kts — the slipstream noise gets progressively louder the faster you are flying with the Gear or flaps close to/over the max speed and extended)
         c) Allow the jet to Accelerate to E – Egress speed (it’ll come quickly!!)
9) At E, Throttle back and remain pitched 10 degrees to maintain E speed
         a) Never exceed Flap speed barber-pole brackets! (FYI: the real jet does not have these, but the C-560XL provides them for better sim pilot experience)
10) When needed, Flaps up all the way, then stay above 150kts airspeed
11) While the above is a summary of the take off experience, you really should follow the checklistsfor all flight phases
12) Navigate to your destination. There are 5 ways to do this in the C-560XL — from the simple Dead reckoning method, to the very-sophisticated GPS-enabled VNAV
With flaps up, gear up, maintain ASI >150 at all times.
Happy Flying!

CLIMBING A REALISTIC ASCENT / CLIMB PROFILE TO CRUISE ALTITUDE:

First, as fashionable as it is to do in airliners, or “other aircraft” in your hanger, or, as used to doing this as you may be, you should NOT (never??) slam the throttles full-gas forward to Take Off.
Acceleration should be limited to 1.5g, or about 3-5 kts per sec max.
If you exceed that, the engines are then producing 120% power in each engine!! The aircraft WILL ZOOM.
That behavior is
a) Not a bug
b) Not the way the aircraft is designed to be operated. So simply do not do that!
That huge excess of power is ONLY provided by the mfgr for EXTREME EMERGENCIES, and the pilots should never operate the engines at full for more than 30 seconds.
In real-life, putting the engines in red for anything more than 30 seconds requires that the aircraft be SENT TO MAINTENENCE to have the engines inspected for damage!!
So again, do not red-line (red line) the engine.
Airliner-style full-gas powered take off is NOT the way real pilots fly this jet. This jet is light AND over-powered BY DESIGN.

INSTEAD, this is what you should do:
Set the N1 bug on the ITT temp gauge to between 80-90%.
THAT is the MAX you should advance the throttles during normal flight to do the same thing that real pilots do to take off.

THEN:
Apply only that power, maintain RWY center-line, and once you have smoothly rotated 100 pitch up when the aircraft is at “R” on the speed tape, then follow this guidance for a realistic climb-power profile to altitude….

The following guidance are general rules of thumb real XL pilots use, BUT, as always, remember that YOU are PIC in command, so fly the jet as YOU deem fit, and more so when guided by ATC

Using this ascent or climb profile will correctly use the jets’ power-curve, and the throttles will correctly follow the detents on the throttle stack
For the ascent, you could use either the Auto Pilot’s VS function, OR the G1000 NOSE UP or NOSE DOWN buttons to fine tune pitch when using the AP
If flying manually, use the pitch wheel (left of the throttles (click its center to quickly center/neutralize it)
DO NOT use the PITCH BUTTONS on the YOKE if on AP — that action will DISENGAGE the AUTOPILOT
At any time, if the AP senses the jet is flying too slow (Angle of attack is too high) — it will by design DISENGAGE to allow the jet’s nose to drop and build safer airspeeds.

         1) Below 10,000ft ALT 225kts pitch at +10o
         2) 10,000 – 16500 ALT 250kts pitch at + 5o
         3) 16,515ft ALT, switch Mach .61 pitch at + 2.9o
         4) At final cruise ALT, 0 pitch, Mach .72

With the guidance above in mind, here is a typical/ideal climb profile to cruising ALT.
This assumes no ATC instructions, and a straight climb-out from Sea Level, using the AUGM mode panel layout’s AUTO THROTTLE to maintain speeds as you climb (but you may also set speeds manually for more of a challenge if you wish)
ON GROUND, DO THIS SETUP FIRST:
         Ensure all checklist items up to Take off are complete. The Annunciator panel should be clear with only “Ground Idle” lighted
         1) Set the ALT target to 40,000
         2) AP TURN Dial to 3
         3) Set N1 bug between 80-90% ITT, with – 90% max (this is important to tell the EEC on Auto Throttle to not redline the engines) — (set using dial/box just above standby Radio)
         4) Use default fuel and weights amounts (loads the jet to mid-range)
         5) Engines is idle, Flaps 1 — wait for a Clear Annunciator panel while the flaps and STAB MISC are cleared.
         6) Brakes off

TAKE OFF and CLIMB:
         7) Advance throttles smoothly, until N1 is at bug — (the “TO” light on little box left of PFD lights up, throttle levers on TO DETENT in Throttle stack)
         8) At “R” on speed tape, (it will come quickly) Rotate and smoothly pitch up 10 degrees
         9) With positive rate, gear up
         10) Throttle back >150 feet AGL to manually maintain Egress “E” speed of 160kts
         11) At 1000 ft, engage AP
         12) Also now engage AT: set 160kts
         13) Flaps up, climbing about 15-1700 fpm
         14) At 3,000 AGL, accelerate to 200 kts using AT speed setting, climbing now ~3000 FPM
         15) Fine tune pitch using:
                  a) G1000 nose up/down buttons OR
                  b) (recommended) engage AP-VS and use its pitch wheel to tune pitch — using the AP-VS option ensures that when the target ALT is reached ALT is captured by the AP
         16) At 8,000 the FADEC/EEC system will get the jet into CLB config to maintain 200Kts
         17) At 10,000 ALT accelerate to 250kts, still in CLB detent, now going 5,000FPM climb — max rate!
         18) At 20,000 ALT pitch down to 5 degrees pitch; Now ~3000 FPM. Maintain 200Kts
         19) Transition to MACH at 26,515 ft (press AT speed dial). Accelerate to 0.60 – 0.62m; Now climbing ~3,20fpm
Now you will start to see the airspeed indicated window begin to slowly wind down, BUT the jet is still maintaining mach.61 true
Watch the AOA INDEXER to make sure the needle is left (less than AOA) of the small yellow line at its 6 o’clock position
That’s showing the wing is generating max lift!
         20) At 30,000 ALT, pitch down to 2.5 deg, still climbing 1500fpm
         21) IF using the AP VS function, the AP will capture the ALT Target at 40,000 as we set in (1)
IF NOT using the AP (just the G1000 nose up/down buttons) then the AP is NOT engaged, and it will NOT capture the ALT target — you will been to level off manually (See 15b) above.
At 40,000 accelerated to .71 mach… throttle might drift into TO detent, but should then settles back down at CLB. — it is normal to see the CLB light on for high speed, high ALT cruise.

If you fly at m.61 at 40,000 the throttle detent on the throttle stack will be square on the CLB detent. This is normal.
Any speed faster (like .71) will move the detent on the throttle stack between CLB and TO, and that’s normal for the EEC to maintain that.
As long as you do not get into to the TO detent area for >5 min, or redline the ITT, or hit max speed aural or PFD warnings, then the aircraft is flying normally.
If weather is gusty, strong cross winds — fly slower.
The EEC uses the CRU detent only for < 20,000 ALT slower cruise flying.

Changed Weights, weather, altitudes, temperatures will all effect this “ideal” climb profile.


ABOUT SLIPSTREAM SOUNDS:
The faster you fly, the more you will heard louder air-stream noise.
The jet is usually quite quiet when flown at the proper airspeeds, so hearing loud roaring slipstream sounds means something is not set up correctly:
Causes for loud airstream roaring…
         * Flying with gear down close to/over 220Kts (gear down never extend speed) Over 200 and it is VERY loud — as reported by real pilots in the real jet.
         * Speed brake extensions at higher speeds — BUT, that’s OK — the aircraft IS designed to open the SB’s at ANY airspeed, but its a good sound reference to have
         * Approaching Vne speeds at different ALTs — Watch also the PFD speed-Redline indicator warnings
         * Flying at the top end of the various Flap speeds — Watch the Speed tapes — you should be flying in the mid-to-lower half of each flap’s speed bracket.

LANDING:

Autopilot (AP) AutoLandings: The real C-560XL is not certified by the US FAA to land on autopilot. (the real thing also does not have an AUTO THROTTLE either)
Real pilots disengage the AP before TD (usually when the Airport is “clear and close” or at specified ALTs as required for precision and non precision approaches)
Read more in the AP section. Sim pilots for the AirSim3D C-560XL are encouraged to follow this Authentic real-life practice too. 

But, we are in a sim, so, it is possible to land the AirSim3D C-560XL on AP using APRoach tuned to an ILS VOR, OR a GPS APR, but this requires precise speed control using the throttles, and all AOA green cues all the way right down to the RWY threshold. If you wish, to fly the jet using AP-APR, and if your speeds are Flap3 and precisely 110kts + – 2kts, then, when you hear the “50” callout over the runway, chop the throttles to idle, and the jet will flare and AutoLand. With main gear down, the nose will remain elevated — disconnect the AP, gently lower the nose, maintain RWY CENTER, deploy REVERSERS and SPEEDBRAKES (they are not spoilers) and when <60 stow Reversers/Speed brakes, pull flaps all the way up.
Congratulations you have defied the FAA and AUTOLANDED. Expect a heavy fine from them!!

The AirSim3D C-560XL trailer on YouTube flown in XP11 (and using a really early version of the jet — no pilots, no FMOD as examples) demonstrates an AutoLanding on AP at the very end of the trailer.
If you can do the same, Bravo, YOU GOT SKILLS!!! IN XP12 — woo! AP-landings get harder to set up for correct execution — fly the black bar on the speed tape at flaps 3 PRECISELY! Fun to try though!

MORE about AUTOLAND in XP12:
As XP12 continues to advance, we have also tuned the Autoland capabilities for the C-560XL to keep pace!
Beginning C-560XL XP12 V1.6, the Autoland advice provided above about how to Autoland gets a little more nuanced.
Yes, is is STILL VERY important to maintain precise 110kts approach airspeed.
Yes, you should be managing airspeed with the throttles manually, not using Auto Throttle. This will give you more control in the final seconds before and after TD given the updated guidance and comments below.
BUT the subtle update for xp12 v1 betas and above is this:
If you chop the throttle at the 50ft altitude call out as mentioned above, the jet will land, but with a slight thump.
Which is not incorrect — “butter landings” are for gamers. Real-world pilots make the aircraft contact the RWY to avoid greased landings and risk aquaplaning (especially on damp/wet runway surfaces).
So you can continue to do that, but if you do want to impress your friends, then do this for a more gentle landing:
At about 100 ft you will notice the the aircraft will begin its auto-flare as the nose gently lifts — and as a result, airspeed will begin to drop.
At this time you can chop the throttle at 50ft and the aircraft will land, or, at that time apply just a VERY TINY bit of throttle to MAINTAIN 110. Too much throttle and you will speed up, and as a result float or worse balloon! So watch out!! In this case, less (throttle) is better! Keep practicing to learn just how much throttle is needed to float the aircraft to the runway (if that’s what you want!)
If you can maintain 110 the jet will slowly settle at a more shallow descent, and when you hear the 20ft alt callout, THEN reduce the throttle all the way to idle, and the jet will/should grease onto the tarmac.
But be aware… this will ALSO cause a longer touchdown point, and you’ll probably be out of the runway TD zone, so be careful if you have a short runway… on TD get the reversers and speed brake deployed asap, and apply brakes to slow down quickly!!


Landing basics: (use checklists to correctly set the jet up for a safe landing)
          * Follow flap/speed barber poles in the PFD speed tape which appear for each flaps settings — your speeds should never exceed or be below their brackets 
          * Depending on Altitude (ALT) density/temps and weight, your approach power should be 55-70 N1 if all is well/set up correctly
          * For each of the top 2 flap settings, there is a green line Speed Ref marker somewhere on the speed tape within its bracket; Maintain that speed for correct speed and AOA green cues at each flap setting (assuming everything else with the approach is good). HOWEVER: You are the PIC. FLY the Jet first. Its silly to be sitting at perfect AOA while 500 ft. above the Glide Slope as displayed on the ILS!
                  IN XP12: In the improved flight model the aircraft’s weight, alt density, speed, turbulence all play a bigger role that was the case in XP11, for how the jet handles.
                  This is particularly critical at slower flight phases — like during APR etc.
                  Therefore, don’t be surprised if the AP DIS ENGAGES when a gust hits causing the jet to get slow when at higher airport alts or weights and your seed is at or below the markers of reference speeds!
                  This is NOT A BUG. It is the design of the AP keeping the jet safe.
                  If the AP senses that the Jets AOA is too high to maintain the ALT, VS, or GS that it has been tasked to fly, it will disconnect rather than stall the jet.
                  THEREFORE in XP12 especially, have acute situationally awareness of your aircraft limits at each moment of your flight!!
                  If you have gusts, low density air, higher aircraft weights, gear/flaps coming down increasing drag, then FLY FASTER by manually throttling up, or dialing up the speed if using the AUTO THROTTLE, to HIGHER than the reference speed, to fly safely.
          The trick is to fly as fast as is needed to maintain the AOA gauge needle to never be in Yellow/red. As long as you do that, the AP should remain ENGAGED.
          * For the final Flap setting, there is a black line marker, try not to go much below that airspeed — the danger of stalling increases exponentially. To correct: ADD POWER first (NOT pitch or you WILL quickly stall the aircraft), and then if needed a bit of pitch-up (Watch the AOA dial and cues of guidance!), to get above and stay at or above that line, and to get to AOA green cues
          * Manually flying the jet to get the right AOA green cues while on GS is a ballet — a dance with the throttles, the wind, its direction, the ambient temps, your airport altitude, influenced by aircraft weight and configuration, … and they all have to be in harmony, where they ought to be. Where is that?? — its for you as PIC to find out — that’s what precision flying is all about! The margins to shift off green are narrow. One thing affects another (as in the real jet) — so, use small, deliberate movements, small corrections. Make them and then watch how the jet reacts. Practice makes perfect!
          * Don’t change flaps if you are not in the MID-LOWER part of your current Flap setting… you may balloon slightly if the flap change is made when speeds are high…woop-ti-do-tummy-ticklers-for guaranteed for your children passengers! On a more practical note, it will throw you off your Glide Slope.
          * Once over the threshold ease back power, and gently pull back on the yoke. How much?… done correctly, a flare “cushions” the jet to fly in ground effect, onto the ground, not at the ground. (does not stall it). If you “float”, its because your approach speed was higher than needed. (See “green line Speed Ref marker” above)
          * Real Pilots allow the jet to contact the ground smartly to (especially) avoid aquaplaning — all aircraft should actually. “Butter landings” are for gamers, not real pilots, but, fun to record and share
          * Stay on the RWY centerline how-to-do-that here, with rudder, especially with cross wind landings. Rudder pedals are recommended, but not essential to help stay centered
          * For CROSS WIND LANDINGS, maintain directional control with the rudder, and lower the upwind wing slightly, land on that-sides main gear first, and use the rudder to round out out of the crab to center the jet to the runway, and use it aggressively once on the ground to avoid ground loops. Maintain control first, then, once you have that, (and once at least both main gear are down) THEN apply Reversers and Speed brakes. (They are not automatic) Always fly the jet first. Only apply functions after it is under control.
          * First open Speed brakes to help slow down if needed. (They are NOT spoilers that kill lift, by design) They are not auto deployed.
          * When there is weight on ALL BOTH REAR wheels, only then DEPLOY the Throttle Reverse thrusters. And be careful not to let the nose gear slam forward!
                    The reverse buckets take 3 secs to deploy.
                    ONLY when you see the white DEPLOY annunciator lighted (Top, THRUST REVERSER panel section), only then APPLY reverser thrust using the throttles.
          * Maintain the RWY center line with rudder >60kts., then use toe brakes gently for steering control below <60kts
                    IN XP12:CAUTION: The amount you push forward on the yoke during a ground roll gets more critical at higher ground speeds.
                    Loading the front wheel by pushing forward on the yoke too aggressively increases the friction of the front wheel on the tarmac, and since it is that wheel that steers the aircraft on the ground, directional control will get progressively more sensitive the higher the ground speed is from the nose-down forces delivered by the aerodynamics of the Elevator and front wheel friction. Then steering may get dicey. If you find that happening, ease back some on the stick to lower the friction of the nosewheel on the ground (reduce sensitivity) to help regain back directional control. (more friction is not more control, its more sensitivity)
          * Stow the throttle reverser buckets when ASI <60 kts. and use symmetric Toe brake as needed to brake and maintain the centerline (ALERT: you did follow the checklists and the Parking brake handle was off (in) when you landed, yes?) Another little trick to try — keep the reverser buckets open under 60 kts, BUT DO NOT throttle — that way they can act as small sails to aid slowing down as you roll down the RWY. But be careful, remember they are still open (annunciators lit up front!) when you begin to use throttles to exit the RWY! Even so, the real practice is to stow them < 60kts.
          * Retract Flaps
          * Speed brakes in
          * QED — you’ve arrived. Job well done.  
          * If you set the Pressurization correctly, your passengers and yourself will arrive safely and in comfort.

The JET’s CENTERLINE: A LOT of care and time has been spent to correctly align the pilot’s head position to be centered and aligned with the sight balls on the downtube as in the real jet.
An 85 degree sim field of view (FOV) setting is recommended.
With this your FOV will include the necessary instruments for normal flight, with have low fish-eye distortion.
Generally if the width of the RWY center line is contained within 2 imaginary vertical lines drawn from the mic on the left, and from the screw immediately to its right; then the nosewheel will be travelling on the RWY center line.
The correct head position is when in the pilots or copilots seat, the small white ball (in the tray on the front down tube) is centered exactly in front of the larger orange ball behind it for that side.  From that correct head position, (from the Pilots seat position) the center of the RWY will be located at the small left screw, found just to the right of the cockpit microphone (the object on the front dash with the round blue washer).  
In this jet you do not have to “guess” where the runway center line is anymore!

Listing of Essential switches and functions for general flight safety, planning, and navigation:

Follow the links below for more information — even though the list is numbered, it is in no particular “order” — since each person will need to review things at their pace, and when they need it.

Why is it not in a tradition list — like “other” manuals???
Because we like a more conversational and less “starched” approach.
Yes, “others” may do that, we don’t.

Moving on…

While this “index/list” — call it what you want, is nice, we recommend using the FIND/SEARCH option in your browser to search for items in this POH as there are many topics that are cross referenced, have dependencies on other topic etc., and its impossible (and would be wrong) if we tried to have it “all in one place”.

Take for example the term “PFD” — it has its own topic, but is also reference in over 150 places. So it would be crazy to try to have everything that mentions the PFD, or has dependencies on it, to all be in one big honking topic.

Generally when searching, use the terms and Labels in the Jet to find topics. (like CROSSFEED instead of CROSS FEED)
Even though we wrote the manual, we still use the “Find…” function most often to find what we are looking for.
It works.
Moving on…
         1) Get a quick visual tour of the various parts and views of the Cockpit. Also read why you can expect the cockpit labeling to look less sharp (from a distance), and the overall instrumentation look to darker. IN XP12 compared to XP11 (its an XP12 LR design feature that they are still working on)
         2) To begin, the C-560XL has an on-demand mode that switches between REAL and AUGMENTED mode panel layouts. Find the small switch marked REAL/AUGM on the pilots side, low left.
                  a) If you have the switch on AUGM you will set Flight Director, VOR/GPS navigation options, AUTO THROTTLE, and Minimums in the upfront/dashboard MFD control panel.
                  This mode is NOT what’s in the real jet — it is a one-off custom feature not found in the real jet that we intentionally designed to make the SIM experience easier.
                  b) If you have the switch on REAL then all the aforementioned dials and buttons will be moved to the Center Console/Pedestal, between the pilot and co-pilot seats
                  This mode IS what’s in the real jet.
                  c) AUTO THROTTLE is another custom feature added to the jet, but NOT available when the panel is set to be in REALISTIC mode (the real jet does not have Auto throttle)
                  Set your choice of panel mode to the layout that inspires you most when flying.
                  d) Setting Real or Augments modes also has an effect on how the custom AOA INDEXER works
         3) The jet is equipped with a custom, 100% authentically functional, designed, and lighted Auto Pilot (AP). And except for using the G100’s VNAV function, we recommend that you use the custom AP exclusively to fly from one place to another. Therefore, invest time in learning how to use the Jets custom AP to make navigation easy and fun! And so to is the custom Auto Throttle option (button labeled AT and displayed only in Augmented mode up front panel only) along with heading, course, speed, and altitude dials.
         4) The custom PFD is the primary instrument for speed, altitude, pitch and roll, its lower half contains a custom HSI, and its top status bar displays AP status and other flight data. Clicking its face pops-out this instrument. It does not “replay” when in Replay and outside camera view. There are various options to choose from in the EFIS CONTROL PANEL
         5) The MFD with ROSE-ARC MODE displays also contains the aircraft’s authentic checklists, and also has 6 navigation/mapping Sub-modes (buttons) to display flight plan progress and data, and-or directional hoz/vert VOR information from the MFD CONTROL PANEL
         6) The MFD is also the source to display Terrain and Weather Radar, as well as Waypoints, Airports, VOR and ADF station mapping around the aircraft. Clicking its face pops-out this instrument. IN XP12 this has got a make over to display at a higher-resolution. The display in XP11 can not be made sharper due to an XP11 MFD design limitation.
         7) Atop the dash is the all-important aircraft systems Annunciator panel with its No Take off conditions to correct before Take Off.
         8) On the Port and Starboard you will find the Fuse Panels with a total of 143 fuses.  These are non functional — WHY not???!!
         Please read this topic in the FAQ: For the price, we expect things like flight-tablets, working fuse panels!!?
         9) On that same side, you will find the fully functional Large/Guarded/Important Battery and Interior Disconnects and various Vent and Light dimmer dials — all these animate and operate the jet’s lighting.
         10) The aircraft has an extensive array of over 300 real, aimed and tuned bulbs for spectacular night flying from the standard Nav, Tail recognition, Wing Inspection and Strobes, to Custom Pulse Landing lights, (that adjust their pulse/steady for TCAS, Transition alts., and landing Flag/Gear configs!) to something called shark lights… all faithfully modeled, tuned, directed. Pools of light and reflections change when things move, brightness and section-dimmers all work, and there are lights that you can reposition, and much more in the COCKPIT and CABIN LIGHTING section.
         11) The fully functional Yoke provides pitch and roll and has working buttons for finer AP and Trim control with a fully functional TCS option (a fantastic differentiator that is not found in most other XP aircraft). And the Rudder is used to change horizontal direction (a little pro-pilot secret.. use the rudder to make small, quick directional changes with the rudder (“kick it over”) to get the jet to line up with the RWY center line to set up a landing — not aileron roll). All buttons on the Yoke function/work.
         12) Find the 4 Handles beneath the Pilot-side Dashboard to use the PARKING BRAKE, EMERGENCY BRAKES, CONTROL LOCK (sometimes referred to as a GUST LOCK) here; and also the AUX GEAR CONTROL (for emergency gear blow-down) to be used in case of a Hydraulic failure/emergency.
         13) Use the G1000 to load Flight plans that were created in something like Little Map — a free and fun tool to use to create FP’s, and in our opinion easier and more fun that better than punching FMC buttons and getting frustrated with that process. Please read the LR documentation to learn how to operate the G1000 instrument. Read this section about the 5 ways to navigate in the C-560XL , from dead reckoning to the sophisticated GPS VNAV — the C-560XL is capable of it all.
         14) Why no FMC??? Please read this. Honestly though, all we use the G1000 for is to upload Flight plans (which we had more fun creating in things like Little Map) then we forget about it (EXCEPT to VNAV) and instead used the 100% authentic/replicated bug-free Autopilot — which real pilots use 95% of the time anyway. In the jet, clicking on the top and/or lower half of the G1000 will pop out the PFD or MFD respectfully.
         15) There is a neat little lighted Throttle Detent Indicator box found left of the Pilot-side PFD (none on the CP side) to enable you to see where your throttles are positioned without having to look down at the throttle stack. We saw this in the real jet we often visited for reference tours at Boeing field and replicated it! Be sure to also read this to fly a realistic power profiled ascent to cruise altitude the way real pilots do!
         16) Take a look at the COMM/AUDIO Panel if you need to talk/listen to ATC. The Radio Management Unit (RMU) is used to tune radios and transponders that the AP uses to automate flight-leg navigation contained in the flight plan loaded. Below it you will find options to broadcast your IDENT in various modes, including MODE C for Position and ALT.
         17) On either side of the dashboard find the 4-function clock to include automatically tracking your FL/Flight Time, and which operate independently on the Pilot and CP sides, and a DME that displays distance, closure, and station data. Unlike the independent clocks, the same VOR/GPS (L to R) — distance, time-to, closure speed and name station abbreviation data displays in both DME’s. ADF display shows the Station ID only.
         18) Make sure the Main door is locked properly and the Lav doors are stowed open (as it is required). The Emergency Exit is back there too. If not correctly set up, you’ll see lighted upfront Annunciators.
         19) It’s very important to Pressurize the jet — it’s operational ALT is 41,000 ft.! If not pressurized above 10,000 ft., black-out is inevitable (if set in the X-Plane UI). The fully functioning 3-mode pressurization panel does this job, and below it is the panel to set the Air Conditioning units (AC, A/C) internal ambient temps for both Cockpit and Cabin/passenger comfort.
         20) Also on the main Center Console/Pedestal, find many labeled passenger safety, and navigation lights switches under the fully functional Light Paneland theDay/Night instrument brightness switch which makes the instruments bright in the day, but then can also be set for spectacular night-time flying. No “dark cockpits” in this jet!! (It IS correctly labeled, and works per Cessna’s design) Details here: COCKPIT and CABIN LIGHTING section.
         21) The Center Console/Pedestal is also where you will find the ANTI ICE switches. It takes up to 4 1/2 minutes of time for flight surfaces and engine deice systems to heat up and work (depending on ambient temps, and other factors) so plan ahead!!
                  IN XP12 you will see Windshield frosting in icing conditions, and at night the icing lights (positioned in the small tube structures at the base of the downtube) will glow the front of the cockpit red to warn of icing! Frost on the WS does not necessarily mean the icing lights will automatically turn on to glow — icing lights only turn on when there is icing on the aircraft.
         22) Further down in the middle section of the Center Console/Pedestal on the left find the large Pitch Trim wheel. Move it forward to lower the aircraft nose down, pulling back on it has the opposite effect.
Click the wheels center to quickly reset it to its neutral position. The Aileron and Rudder trim wheels are positioned on the Center Console/Pedestal, towards the rear — the big dials. Click them in the center to quickly reset them to their centers.
         23) The very important Throttle quadrant to the right, with its reverser paddles.
         24) Further to the right you will find the equally important Flaps setting handle. Set the handle to its first notch for Take off. Read more about Flaps-Flying tail-related STAB MISC warnings.
         25) At the lower end of the throttle block you’ll find the LANDING/TAXI LIGHT switches, including the custom TCAS enabled and flight profiled PULSE LANDING LIGHTS. And the SPEED BRAKE switch under its guard.
         26) To their left find also the ROTARY TEST dial — this works authentically and conducts tests exactly like the real jet does!. It has 11 stations that time and check many jet functions. Be patient as you click through each station and observe how the tests cycle through with relevant instruments visually showing/changing their states as the checks progress. Master and Caution lights also will flash and are cancellable exactly like the real jet.
                  IN XP12, this dial emits real-jet recorded sounds (which also play when needed during flight operations).
         27) The jet has 3 electrical generators to start engines, or to charge its Main and Emergency batteries. Although, unlike Airliners (or maybe other GA aircraft) this jet is quite capable of starting with the Main Battery, provide its has >23 volts. So do not assume (because you do this in other aircraft) you need to have the APU running to start the jet — You’d just be wasting time, and burning extra fuel and imbalances that you will need Fuel Cross Feed to fix, and adding unnecessary use-time on the APU, which the jet owners will not like. Remind yourself, check your assumptions, this jet is 95% realistic, so therefore, different.
         28) The co pilot of the front dashboard contains Auxiliary Power unit (APU) and Battery warnings and annunciators, and the APU PANEL is found on the Co Pilot-sidewall panel of the aircraft. Notice also that there is an aircraft frame continuous time-used counter above it, and an APU time-used counter at the bottom of that panel. The APU switches move, and can start, ONLY if there is main battery power to power and crank it over or charge the battery — although, that’s normally not what’s needed to start; we cover this later in the Engines and Throttles section
         29) The jet includes an authentic replica of a Ground Power Unit (GPU) with a unique “refueling” routine that happens randomly (blue light). It can be connected to the jet and turned on to power the jet and recharge the Main/Emergency batteries. The parking brake is automatically set when the GPU is connected, but is not automatically disengaged once the GPU is disconnected.
         30) If you want to figure out where your TOD should be (given a known distance to airport read from the DME tuned to a VOR) read this excellent article on THINK AVIATION.
Follow the linked topics above to learn more about how to operate them.

Basic How-to SYSTEMS:

First a quick visual tour of the cockpit for familiarize yourself with the cockpit and cabin layout… XP11 images:

         IN XP12: the cockpit has a higher and darker contrast. And labeling is not as quite as sharp as you see in the images provided below from XP11 (that’s why we are using Xp11 images and not XP12).
         THIS IS NOT A BUG, but rather this is the XP12 simulator itself that’s still a work in progress and being fine tuned in its early beta stages!  The sharp and bright XP11 images you see below DID NOT look this good or as sharp in the early iterations of XP11.

If you wish to see the aircraft in XP12, view images on our FB page, or view the Video Tours and tutorials on our YT channel.

Be aware that the earlier numbered YT videos might not look “as good” as the later numbered videos, because the earlier ones were recorded in early Xp12 version, and object rendering in those earlier versions were still a work in progress. (had nothing to do with the aircraft — its all done in Hi-Def, with true PBR materials. Even our lighting comes from over 300 REAL lights, so the glows and colors are NOT from outdated, fake, 2D LIT textures. Those are all real light beams!!
         Please be patient while the XP team updates its Sim v12. With XP12 v0.6 the visuals have become MUCH sharper compared to earlier versions, and our DAY/Night Lighting switches completely solves the “dark cockpit” complaints!!
We do offer a standalone XP11 only jet if that is what you need, get it from the org store here.

The Dashboard, Authentically replicated (down to each screw and panel) based on Real jets we visited at Boeing Field, WA, USA, with the all important, fully functional Annunciator panel up top and the beginnings of the Center Console/Pedestal.
The Yokes have been hidden in this pic to provide better panel detail. See later pics for views of the HIGHLY detailed, and ALL-BUTTONS-WORK Yoke with its custom 3D Cessna center Button

100% of all the vital flight and safety systems and instruments work, 95% of all the switches, dials and buttons do some kind of functioning “work”, but all are 100% are animated.
The ones that do no work are very secondary to the flight experience. (which add to gratuitous FPS hits, so we simply animated them but they “do” nothing) — like increasing the Passenger announcements Vol on the Comms Panel.
The panel layout, colors labels, instrument placement knobs and levers are 100% faithful to the real jets we visited, down to panel lines and screw placements and counts!
FYI: all images in this POH are from XP11. Please Video’s on our YT channel for XP12 exampleseven better!


For what its worth: In Xp11, you will notice sharp lettering, smooth 3D object edges, smooth shadows, and nicely blended ambient occlusion (like the shadows around the smaller panels or instruments fixtures on the dashboard).
In XP12 Betas, this is not the case — you will see jagged shadows, messy and shimmering edges, blurry lettering.
THESE ARE KNOWN XP12 RENDERING BETA BUGS, it has nothing to do with the aircraft, its textures, its shading, or Lighting.
We fully expect all all the rendering issues in the sim to automatically get better as XP12 matures.

ABOVE: Spectacular Night Time Flying from over 300 real 3D lights. No fake, painted-on LIT pools of light anywhere in this aircraft
Don’t blame us if you now fly more at night!!
The effect is created and delivered by ~300 individually tuned and aimed lights for real-light beam produced Glow and Reflections everywhere
There are No, zero, zip, nada, 2D Lit cockpit area textures, with NO FPS hit! (we used a special technique to achieve this)
Larger lights cast light further; Colored lettering and numbers cast glows on their instrument bezels and surroundings!
IN XP12: Try this, night, dark (no airport lights close, or at altitude) set Main Battery switch to EMEG (down). Observe real light glows!
IN XP12 continued: To then reset out of EMERGENCY, first GENS L, R down to center, then Battery switch all the way UP to Normal, and then bring the Gens back online again.
Move the throttles, or switches, and the reflections on these objects change with their movement
The Pic above shows a specific location on the RT test in progress — this is #9 of a total of 10 authentic tests on this 11 position dial)
Generally you would NEVER want to see every Annunciator panel, AP, and other warnings lighted up like this!!

Back to daytime images below…

Above: Downtube instruments and main annunciator panel
Orange and White “Sight balls” — very important to maintaining the jet on the RYW centerline in the tray above the night-lighted Wet Compass,
AOA INDEXER (box to its Left) for precise GS control,
Individual Engine Reverser and Stow Panels on both sides of the main annunciator panel,
Port and Starboard Engine fire and Extinguisher buttons,
and the all important fully functional Annunciator panel (42 Windows, 81 functions!),
and partially hidden Master Warning and Caution Switch lights on the main dashboard under the Annunciator panel

IN XP12: Added Icing Light Fixtures: The front-top area of the cockpit will glow red at night if Windshield ICING is detected.
The lights come from the small tube-like structures you will see at the base of the downtube that house these lights.
During daylight you will see frost form on the windshield. See the ANTI ICING section for what to do!

Above: The Pilot side panels… L to R: (this view of of the AUGMENTED MODE — the realistic EFIS control panels in this view will be positions on the Center Console/Pedestal.
Fuse panel (non functional), and very important/fully functional) Main battery and Interior (CABIN) lighting Master/disconnect switches, Map and Night lighting dimmers dials.
The last pilot to fly was a slob, spilled coffee, services will clean up at the end of the day. Just an example of the little things added to enhance the immersion.
Move the adjustable Air vent (both Pilot and CP sides)
Amps and Voltage Dials and selectors
Further down and left.. the (AUG REAL) AUGMENTED or REALISTIC on-demand switch. The panel is in Augmented mode providing an Auto Throttle (not present in the real jet, but provided for convenience.)
Below the Amp dials, are the Fuel boost switches, Starter panel, Battery and Engine Gens, Cross Feed options
The Main PFD: AP status panel up top, Speed and ALT tapes sandwich the 3D Artificial Horizon, with VOR, Pitch and other Nav, Wind, and Rates data in the lower window.
Left of the PFD is the AOA, 6-function Clock
Middle left: The PFD/EFIS and MFD config panels
Below them, a 5 function DME — 1 each on both Pilot and CP sides. (display the same data)
Below that, the Comm panel — one channel must be on to hear ATC, + I, M, O marker tone controls
The lowest strip contains the Lighting and Instrument dimmer dials which dim instruments and Electro Luminescence (EL) lettering and labeling for L, C, R dashboard sections.
And below that are (L to R) Park brake, Control Lock, Emergency brake and Emergency Gear Blow down… all fully functional.

ABOVE: The center panel: L to R and Top to bottom:
Dual channel Com/Nav RMU with Mode C ident, Augmented Modes AP Panel with VVI and Bank (TURN) settings, Standby AH, and VOR.
To their right… Engine glass instruments, N1 setting, Standby 2-channel Comms/Nav RMU
The AP Function Buttons, Other FD and function annunciators
The Custom 2-display (ARC, ROSE) and 6 function MFD (Airports, Waypoints, VOR’s, TCAS OPTIONS, with 23 checklists (NORM) + Weather (WXR) and Terrain (TERR) radars (pop out)
Custom G1000 (PFD and MFD popouts)
Annunciated Gear panel with Antiskid

ABOVE, the Co-Pilot side Panels:
Now you see the Antiskid switch in the gear panel.
The other big instruments are duplicates for the Co Pilot (PFD, RMU, Comm panels etc.) with the exception of:
The APU panel on the side panel, aft of the large Starboard Fuse panel. Its includes continuous Airframe (Hobbs) and APU-use counters.
Back to the dashboard: In the top right corner are the APU annunciators: — APU Fire, Bleed air, fail and other annunciators.
Below that the APU alerts: Volts, Battery temps, and O2 status dials.
The CP is not wearing his headset at this time. :))

95% of all instruments you see work, 100% animated.
The ones left out are very secondary to the flight experience. (gratuitous FPS hits, so we simply animated them but that “do” nothing, left them out)
The panel layout is faithful to the real jets we visited, down to panel lines and screw placements and counts!

ABOVE — the ultra realistic wear and tear textured Yoke
This view is also of the REALISTIC panel view — the real EFIS panels are position left of the PFD to replace the AUGMENTED mode paneling layout.
That’s glass on the center button proudly displaying the Mustang Heritage in full 3D!
It has fully functional AP Disconnect, Touch Control Steering (TCS) and Trim butterfly’s buttons and controls on the handles like the real thing
Convenient large Hide and Show areas (tap the top of the Yoke, or the large blank space below the PFD instrument to show-hide the yoke)
A VR ready manipulator covers the Yoke
Notice the REALISTIC MFD config/setting panels. Compare this image to the first one in this section that shows the Augmented mode layout — which has the Auto throttle options
In REALISTIC mode the AP panel is where it is in the real jet — Center Console/Pedestal
(the pics above showed the Realistic Panel layout)

Above & Below: The Center Console/Pedestal
Home to critical (fully functioning) Anti Ice and Windshield heating, Lights, 3-mode Pressurization system with custom Press Profiles, and dual Cabin/Cockpit Temp setting and monitoring.
Trim Wheel to the left, Speed brake (under guard) Individual Throttle controls with individual reverser functions, Flap handle (with integrated Stabilizer mis-compare — the elevator takes 20 seconds to get into place like the real jet does), Engine Sync
And at the bottom, Fully functional 10 station Rotary test (with MW, MC integration) and Landing/Taxi Lights with Custom Pulse Landing lights (integrated with TCAS and automatic altitude and landing/TO flight profiles)

Above, another view of the AUGMENTED MODE panel layout for the EFIS Control panels.
The Center Console/Pedestal between the 2 seats
PFD and MFD power and configuration buttons and dials.
Autopilot, Aileron and Rudder trim wheels.
This is the AUGMENTED MODE VIEW.
The REALISTIC VIEW would move the Pilot-side EFIS control panel up to the Front, positioned to the left of the Pilot PFD.


Finally, and to wrap up the quick tour, a word about the difference between XP12 (below left) and XP11 (right) COCKPIT VISUALS, in the middle of the day.
The Cockpit in XP12 has a much darker, less sharp (especially Ambient Occlusion — the shadowing caused by shapes and crevices) look and feel.
WHY!!??
This is NOT because of anything we have done (like lowering the resolution)
Its important to keep in mind that the light rendering in XP12 (the sim, not our aircraft) has been totally rewritten by LR.
Therefore, things like AO, tone mapping, sharpness are ALL STILL BEING WORKED ON by LR in their XP12 beta effort. The sim is simply not yet prime-time ready.
We expect this to improve in time as LR works through their known AO and sharpness rendering bugs, but we will not (continually) update XP12 textures precisely because the goalpost is being moved around by LR, and no one knows what the final will require us developers to do.
Also we are on XP11 sim version v5 — and XP12 still in beta. Need we say more?
Things will improve in XP12 over time. We have every reason to believe that as in XP12 improves, our textures will look just as nice and sharp as they do in our XP11 aircraft version automatically. (because they ARE sharp and ARE (true) high res PBR-based textures already)
As an example.. look at the difference between the Annunciator panels in the images below — you can see them when they light up, but so dark otherwise in in XP12. In XP11 you can read them in regular sunlight.
So lets all agree that Textures and Lettering/signs in XP12 are not as sharp as in XP11, AO is splotchy, and overall the cockpit IS much darker with much HIGHER CONTRAST in XP12 compared to XP11 — that’s is the way LR has designed it to be (so far).
If you have more questions, feel free to reach to to us on our support page.

XP12 Cockpit — slightly darker look overall, less sharp lettering (LR has this bug to fix — nothing we can do at this time). Glass reflections are subtle, not distracting, and absorb daylight colors.
There are many calls to LR in Social communities asking them to fix “dark cockpits” this asap.
But our DAY/NIGHT lighting switch does make the cockpit brighter in daytime.
Blurry writing affects all aircraft.
We expect this to get better (sharper, clearer) over time.

XP11 Cockpit — Much brighter overall, much sharper lettering (controlled by the sim).
We have the same lettering in both sims, same 4K resolution.
Many discussions in Social communities comparing how good this looks compared to XP12.

Get back to the INDEX


CHECKLISTS:

Make referring to the checklists your first stop until you get familiar with how the jet operates.
There are 14 flight-phase specific checklists, and some have up to 3 sub pages, for an all up total of 23, built into the jet’s MFD.
TO OPEN CHECKLISTS:
1) Ensure the MFD has power (Center Console/Pedestal, Last panel Co Pilot side = the MFD controller) use the lower of the 2 dials in the controller to set to be not OFF.
2) Click the NORM button on the MFD panel, or the NORM button on the Center Console/Pedestal to display the Normal Procedures Checklists.
3) POP THE PANEL OUT by clicking the MFD face! This is not mandatory, but always a good practice when running checklists because:
         If you change the Battery position to EMERG (during an emergency or when conducting checklist tests) the MFD IS SHUT OFF by design to conserve power, and you will not be able to see the checklists.
         As long as the MFD power switch is on, irrespective of the Battery switch position, a popped out Checklist WILL ALWAYS show the checklists.
So, good practice to always pop out checklists.
4) Choose a flight phase with the mouse by SCROLLING (Not Clicking on a flight-phase, then scrolling (NOT Clicking) over each topic to scroll through its pages.
CHECKLIST behavior
A checklist’s content is displayed by SCROLLING (NOT clicking) on one of the flight phase headings displayed. (NOT the Content pane in the lower half of the Window)
Once you see content (1/3 means you are on the first of 3 pages), THEN CONTINUE TO SCROLL on the flight phase (now underlined too) to page through the content.
You MUST scroll though ALL current flight phase topic pages first to get to a blank page, before you can open any other flight-phase topic.
If checklists are displayed, it will cover other MFD screens being used at the time the NORM is called in the MFD, by design.

Checklists do not have small boxes to be “checked of” as you proceed. That’s not the real jet’s checklists behavior. We opt for “realism”.
Nor is there a “flight bag” of interactive panels to do things like open doors. The real jet has none of that, and again, we opt to “keep it real”.

You may choose to install and operate the Avitab plugin at your own discretion; we did not want to force that (non-authentic) option on every user.
Sure, real pilots DO use tablets in the cockpit, but they are a custom option that pilots choose to set up at their discretion — tablets are NOT shipped with the aircraft by Cessna as a standard item for cockpit use. And to therefore stay consistent with our goal to keeping it real, in the same way, you may choose to install and use Hardware tablets or other add-ons of your own will and choosing to customize your experience just the way real pilots do. But that’s totally up to you, and your decision to make.

We provide what the manufacturer provides in the real jet.

Blinging-out the jet is the operators domain.

For a more detailed reasoning, please read this FAQ: Topic: “For the price, we expect things like flight-tabs, working fuse panels!!?

Related topic: Accessing the Checklists.

Please also read the relevant sections about Manipulators and good-experience button-push behavior.


A custom convenience: On-Demand, REAL AND AUGMENTED MODE PANELS

To overcome some of the real-world design quirks of the real aircraft as we created the Sim version, we decided to create 2 panel “modes” to help in that regard.
The problems we tried to overcome were:
a) The aircraft has no Auto Throttle. Seriously. And for long flights, with real world weather on to bounce the aircraft around, we felt that not having an AT in the sim would be a “convenience” that our sim-pilots would miss, when compared to having a Co-pilot constantly helping to monitor speed changes and engine health to correct things in real life.
b) In the real cockpit, the AP engagement panel, Turn/bank limiter, vvi inputs, and certain EFIS controls are all positioned on the center console. Again, great design for when in the real world where looking down is easy, but imagine having to look up and down constantly in the sim!! Uhgg!
So to overcome or, or better said– “alleviate” some of these “less optimal” experiences in the sim, we created, again, for pure sim-convenience, 2 panel modes.
We also talk about this in a more point-form here: Custom Real-Authentic AP-AT Modes  but read on…

The AUGMENTED Panel mode is the default panel.
But you can change that with a simple on-demand switch-flip to set the cockpit up to be a REALISTIC C-560XL panel by flipping the small switch on the lower left area of the dashboard on pilot side labeled REAL – AUGM. (Image 1 below)
However both mode instrument clusters displayed, FUNCTION in the same manner.
REFER TO IMAGES BELOW.
 
What each mode provides:
         1) REALISTIC PANEL MODE: (Image 4)
(#4 Below) This is the real jet buttons, labels, positioning, lighting layout.
The EFIS Control panel’s are placed on the Dashboard upfront.
There is no AOA digital readout (shown in image 2).
The MFD controller + AP/YD/VVI dial/bank angle instrument cluster remain correctly POSITIONED down on the Center Console/Pedestal.  
There is NO auto throttle (as in real life) available in this mode.
Clicking the HDG SYNC dial realistically snaps the HDG bug to the aircraft current heading.
         2) AUGMENTED PANEL MODE: (Image 2, 3, 5)
In this mode the jet displays highly Customized EFIS/MFD control panels on the panel up front
ADDS an AUTO THROTTLE capability (does not exist in the real aircraft)
ADDS a AOA digital readout
ADDS a 4th ALT setting dial to the CRS/HDG panel
ADDS airspeed indication “dot” cues (in addition to the normal chevrons) to the AOA INDEXER on the downtube
The AP/YD/VVI and Bank Turn limiting Dial instrument clusters are all MOVED to be POSITIONED upfront on the Dashboard. (Image 3)
The HDG SYNC function in this mode is Augmented
Read more about just layouts, additions, and position changes in greater detail in the topic: PFD in Augmented and Realistic panel layouts.

Images visually below:
1) The Switch position highlighted that quickly changes the panel on-demand from the AUGMENTED TO REALISTIC panel layouts
2 & 3) Augmented instrument clusters
4) Realistic panel
5) View of the Center Console/Pedestal layout

We also have a specific Tutorial (#1.5) that covers the Real and Augmented panels experience in our YT channel.
1) POSITION OF the REALISTIC/AUGMENTED Switch
Flip to change the panel layout on-demand
2) AUGMENTED MODE PANEL (WITH AUTO THROTTLE)
AOA gauge also provide Digital readout.
3) AP Panel Positioned upfront on Dash for easy access in AUGMENTED MODE
RMU top, Standby HSI below

4) REALISTIC MODE EFIS CONTROL PANEL
Also shown: AOA gauge, 5-function clock,
FD button, and 5-function DME (M & Km)
5) This is the view for the AUGMENTED MODE of the Center Console/Pedestal EFIS (Top) AND MFD (Bottom Right)
In the REALISTIC PANEL MODE, the Pilot side EFIS Panel is moved to the front (Image 4)

AUTO PILOT 

There are 2 super critical things to remember about the C-560XL’s Authentic, REALISTIC, and fully customized Autopilot.

Assuming electrical power is available, then:
1) The AP can not be Engaged on the ground; this in line with real jet behavior. You can set conditions in terms of courses, target ALT’s, or heading bugs using the appropriate dials etc., but can not “Engage” the AP until you are in the air.
2) The Bank limiter dial (labeled TURN) MUST first be pointing at the #3 position (pointing straight up) for the AP to engage.

Each time the AP is disengaged, the TURN dial MUST be reset to position 3 if it is not already on 3, for the AP to be available for re-engagement as needed. 
This is a safety feature of the real jet as designed by Cessna. 
Realistically, the AP operation should be restricted to only being turned on >1,000 ft AGL minimum enroute operation.
There is also no AP ARM function in the C-560XL.
Consequently, its not possible, as an example, to click the HDG button for HDG to be lighted but not function until the AP is ENGAGED.
This also means you will not be able to click any of the AP buttons when on the ground.
The FD will only display and work when the AP is functioning once the Jet is in the Air or faster than 50Kts.
In line with real jet behavior, the AP Function buttons are soft buttons — in other words they will not display any button “animation”, except to become off/dull/lighted and cast light on the surrounding physical space when their function is ENGAGED
If the jet gets too slow for its Altitude density, the AP WILL automatically disengage and sound the disengagement alarm to maintain flight safety. This is normal.
How do you know about eminent stalls? … View the AOA round gauge on the Pilot’s side (see images below — its found to the left of the pilot-side Clock)

You should NEVER fly the jet in a manner where the AOA dial needle is in the Red/Yellow area — you are in danger of stalling the jet.
See also the associated topic of the AOA INDEXER instrument found on the front downtube.

AUTOPILOT- USE HEIGHT RESTRICTIONS:
The C-560XL is NOT certified by the FAA to AutoLand to land using the AP.
Real pilots keep the AP disconnect after Take Off, and then disconnect it if on Prior to landing as follows: We recommend you do the same.
         a) TAKE OFF: < 1,000 AGL
         b) PRECISION Landing approaches, (CAT 1 ILS and GPS Precision) disconnect the AP at: 180 ft. AGL
         b) Non-Precision Landing approaches, disconnect AP at: 300 ft AGL

AUTOLANDING: While the real C-560XL is not certified for AutoLanding (nor does it have an AUTO THROTTLE) the sim version can, and we actually demonstrated that it can be done in our YT trailer as the jet lands at the end, but it needs PRECISE speed control, and a small flare at the end while the jet is still on APR AP — if you can do that, YOU GOT SKILLS!!! Try it but don’t tell anyone. (we have heard rumors that real pilots have tried it, but no one will confirm that for fear of visits by the FAA! — HA HA!)
More AutoLand guidance here.


AUTO PILOT FUNCTIONS

Keeping in mind the 2 super critical AP-related things mentioned above, the AP in the C-560XL consists of 2 parts:
         1) A strip of 8 AP custom function buttons located below the N1, ITT and Oil Engine Instruments.
         2) The AP controller panel which contains the ENGAGE, YD, Low — buttons, and the TURN (to control the degree of bank/permitted) and VVI wheel.
All buttons are authentically modeled AP functions with real lights (not 2d lit textures).
In line with real jet behavior, the AP Function buttons are soft buttons that do not show any “animation”, except to become off/dull/lighted and cast light on the surrounding physical space when a function is engaged.

         ALERT 1: The correct procedure to engage the AP is to: FIRST turn the AP on, THEN turn on whatever AP function you need to use.
However, if the TURN dial condition is set to 3, and you are in the air, then if you hit a function button first before engaging the AP, that will simultaneously ENGAGE the AP too, but this is not recommended, or real pilot practice. Try not to do that all-in-one-method since that is not the way real pilots fly the jet.

         ALERT 2: It is a pilot-best-practice that any AP function buttons in use (lighted) should always be deactivated first before Disengaging the Auto Pilot. 
If not, the buttons MAY remain lighted, but inactive, and could pose the following problem:
         * If left lighted (engaged status), and then if the AP is re-engaged again, the jet will assume it needs to follow any functions that is Lighted/already engaged, and therefore might react in overly aggressive ways.
         As an example: you are flying way off course from where the Lighted HDG function bug is set. Engaging the AP in this case will immediately turn the jet to that heading.
         Another example: if the Lighted ALT is set to some higher altitude, + the jet is off course from the Lighted HDG bug by say 90 degrees, then if the AP is engaged, the jet will turn and climb aggressively and may exceed the turn constraint annunciator (green curved bar in PFD based on altitudes) and might also stall the jet (unless you have the AUTO THROTTLE working) and you will therefore not be flying safely.
         So, buttons off first, then disengage the AP.

         ALERT 3: You may find that you can not “disengage” the ALT function button IF the ALT BUG is very close to the actual ALT the AP is trying to hook on to. The usually happens when the blue bug is covering the Actual Altitude Window. Be patient. Give the AP about 10-15 seconds and then try to disconnect the ALT function again, and it will. Alternatively you could DISENGAGE the AP and that would also turn the ALT capture off, but that is not the way pilots fly this jet.
AP Function Buttons — No position change in REAL or AUGMENTED Modes
AP BUTTON FUNCTIONS: Obviously this assumes the AP is ENGAGED (ON)
HDG sets a compass heading with the use of the heading dial on the PFD controller. HDG can be engaged by pushing the AP HDG button, or the Heading Dial itself — In both cases the dial will light up to show its engaged status.
NAV is Horizontal Navigation. it uses VOR tuning for whichever VOR1 or 2 or GPS is active. CRS is set using Course1 (or 2) dials on the PFD controller. CRS can be engaged by pushing the NAV AP button, or the Course1 or 2 Dials — which light up to show their engaged status.
APR will follow an ILS if it is tuned to a VOR station (this mode engages HDG, NAV and the APR buttons simultaneously). The DME (left and right of the Pilot and CoPilot PFD’s) are available for distance, time and other data.
BC follows a back course heading from a tuned VOR. It does not function in GPS mode. IMPORTANT: Once you pass a station, (watch the DME add miles to show distance to being added) the VOR course must be turned to point BACK TO the station just passed — to whatever outbound course you wish to track (the Triangle in the HSI must be YELLOW and pointing back to the Station just passed). Only then Engage the Back Course Function on the AP. If you do not set this up correctly, and engage BC, the jet will fly BACK to the VOR station! This is by design. It is designed to work backwards, but you have to set it up to do that.

AP CONTROL DIALS labeled COURSE1, HEADING, ALT SEL, and COURSE2
In the Augmented mode panel (see more in the topic just above this AP functions topic) you will find this strip of 4 dials just below the AOA gauge left of the main PFD.
In the Realistic mode panel mode, they migrate down to the center console between the pilot seats, and that’s where they are positioned in the real jet.
But in both cases, they function equally.
Clicking the dials will cause the AP to fly their commanded settings — they are NOT snap-to functions, by design. They do not follow the default G1000 function but are instead customized to function as-designed.
As an example, if you are flying a HGD of 270 on an AP controlled flight plan, but the blue HDG bug in the PFD is set to, say, heading 300, then clicking HEADING PUSH SYNC on the HEADING dial will cause the jet to immediately turn and fly TO HDG 300. Unlike what you may be used to in other aircraft that simply mimic g1000 behavior, this action is NOT a passive snap-the-HDG-bug-to-the-course-under HDG-in-the-PFD function.
If you want that passive behavior, click the G1000 3d object’s HGD dial on the front panel, or its G1000 PFD pop out’s HDG dial to get that passive snap-to-behavior.
Assuming the AP is engaged and functioning, the dials instead will change the AP HDG function to on, and will actively TURN the aircraft TO wherever the bug is set TO on the PFD.
VNAV IN XP11:enables vertical navigation of an entered flight plan.
         SPECIAL VNAV NOTES:
         Since the C-560XL uses the G1000 as its primary flight computer, it is your responsibility to learn to use the G1000 instrument.
         It is ESPECIALLY critical to read the Default G1000 manual from LR to learn how to use the G1000’s VNAV function!!  There are exact and detailed steps to follow (Precisely) to get it to work well.
         There is no VNAV customization in the C-560XL — the jet simply uses the default G1000 functionality with NO code added. Using VNAV is using the G1000 function exclusively.
         Here is a great YouTube lesson from the folks at Laminar, and should be must-do studying if you wish to use the VNAV function. 
         And finally, there is NO VNAV for ascents. This is not an omission, but a basic design of the X-Plane platform… ascent VNAV is not available for general aviation classification aircraft using the G1000 — in which classification the C-560XL sits.
VNAVIN XP12: Given the the AP rule changes LR now has in place in XP12, its even more important to forget about using the G1000 for everything except for loading flight plans, and to always use the jet’s custom AP. More about this change, in the G1000 section.

ALT and VS, using the VVI dial Pitch Rate:
These 2 functions are closely associated with one another. They are normally used in concert as one affects the other.
         1a) IN XP11: Clicking ALT on the AP strip will instantly set the blue ALT bug to the altitude tape height at the moment ALT was pressed and the Aircraft will climb or descend to the bug.
         1b) IN XP12: Clicking ALT on the AP strip will have NO indication — the Blue ALT bug WILL REMAIN where is it set referring to the Bleu numbers above the ALT tapes. Once ALT is clicked, the aircraft will attempt to climb or descend to the POINT OF ALTITUDE when the ALT function was clicked, and will level to that altitude accordingly.

NOTE… the jet is designed to NOT be aggressive with ALT capture (to avoid G-loads). Speed plays a big role in how aggressive the Jet pitches up or down to intercept ALT — the faster you are, the longer it will take (yes, sometimes yo-yo through the bug) until finally settling down to the ALT bug. This is to minimize airframe and passenger G-load.
         2) ALT is also used to fly to an altitude.  For this:
                  a) FIRST set the desired altitude target using the ALT dials on the PFD controllers (see REAL, AUGMENTED modes above for their location), or look at the Center Console/Pedestal for the ALT SET dial.
                  b) Then Engage VS (NOT ALT —  if you do that you loop back to (1a, b ) above)
                  c) With VS engaged notice that the red caret in the VVI arc in the bottom half right side of the PFD, will snap to 0.
                  d) Now SET your desired VVI rate of descent or ascent PITCH RATE based on the direction you need to head to your ALT target set in 2a by using the VVI dial
                  e) The jet will now pitch to the vvi just set by the VVI dial. You must Manage Airspeed. VVI can be changed at any time. Watch the AP annunciation in the PFD top bar for in-progress (white) and captured (green) Status.
                  f) When the jet reaches the ALT bug, VS will shut off and ALT will engage automatically.
You have arrived at the preset ALTitude.

To then change ALT target after ALT is captured (when the Green ALT Status displays in the PFD top annunciation strip), you MUST FIRST change the ALT target (that’s the Blue numbers top of the ALT tape, by using:
Only in AUG mode: the ALT SEL dial on the upfront EFIS panel only available in AUGmented mode
In AUG or REAL mode:
A) The dial labeled VS in the center panel between seats
B) OR the ALT dial in the G1000 PFT Pop Out (click the top half of the G1000 physical object on the front panel)
… to change and set the ALT TARGET to something other that the current ALT the jet is flying at, or else the AP ALT function can not be disengaged.
Flight Level Change (FLC) IN XP12: Given the the AP rule changes LR now has in place in XP12, its even more important to forget about using the G1000 for everything except for loading flight plans, and to always use the jet’s custom AP. More about this change, in the G1000 section.
Performing a Flight Level Change (FLC):
As a pilot said to us during our FLC design and testing: “You flight level change TO a set altitude“.
This “fly to” concept is important to keep in mind, as the FLC function NEEDS an ALTITUDE TARGET to ascend or descend TO. 
And as a consequence, there are 2 important INPUTS that the jet uses to fly to that target — airspeed, and pitch.

Generally, and in regular airlines and such which have auto throttles, the pilots set their target ALT, engaged the AP’s FLC, the jet captures the CURRENT SPEED, and then based on power, it will pitch up or down to try to maintain that airspeed. This is probably what you are used to.

The C-560XL uses the same concept, BUT since the real C-560XL DOES NOT have an Auto throttle, the jet is designed to execute FLC’s in different ways compared to the observation above. 

Since C-560XL is a 95% replicated jet, it too has no AT in its REALISTIC MODE PANEL, and as a consequence, the ability to “dial in/set” the speed bug in the upfront PFD (Even though you see the blue speed bug in the speed tape) is not available. The exception is when using the G1000 FLC function (IN XP11 ONLY) — more on this in a bit.
The X-Plane version of the C-560XL has been AUGMENTED in a couple of ways (READ MORE HERE) — but most important for this FLC topic — the team ADDED an AUTO THROTTLE. You will see and can use the AT ONLY in the AUGMENTED MODE PANEL.
It is therefore very important to keep in mind: What PANEL MODE YOU ARE USING will determine which of the 2 available FLC functions, options, and experiences you will use to fly an FLC in the C-560XL.
It was the AirSim3D Team’s design goal to give you 2 FLC experiences — you need to choose which one you which to use — a REALISTIC, or AUGMENTED FLC experience. 
The 2 experiences are NOT the same.
You can not mix the two and expect the same functionality in both.
This is by design.

Please note, IN XP12: Given the the AP rule changes LR now has in place in XP12, its even more important to forget about using the G1000 for everything except for loading flight plans, and to always use the jet’s custom AP. More about this change, in the G1000 section.

IN XP11 ONLY, THE REALISTIC MODE is the Realistic FLC experience; you MUST use the G1000 instrument’s FLC buttons and experience only. You MUST NOT use the jets AP-FLC, mixed with/and when using the G1000 FLC function.
The Jets FLC Function, used alongside the AUGMENTED MODE’S AT function is a DIFFERENT EXPERIENCE.
So please do not expect the FLC to pitch up or down and maintain the speed bug as it does when using the G1000’s FLC function in XP11.

If you want a Realistic experience where the FLC pitches up or down to maintain the speed bug, then in XP11 use the G1000’s FLC in REALISTIC PANEL MODE.
If you want an Augmented FLC experience that can use AT and the Jets’ AP-FLC button functionality, then use the Jet’s FLC button in AUGMENTED PANEL MODE instead.

1) FLC in REALISTIC PANEL in XP11 ONLY:
This provides the standard speed-bug-capture, then pitch-up-down experience and you will execute an FLC using the G1000’s FLC button (NOT the Jet’s AP-FLC button!)
The AirSim3D team has not touched the G1000 code, it therefore functions as LR has designed. Please refer to the LR G1000 docs for how to use this instrument overall.
To set and run an FLC experience in REALISTIC MODE:
         1) To make executing an FLC using the G1000 easier to set up and monitor, click the TOP half of the G1000 instrument to to pop out its PFD version.
         2) Ensure that the Jets FLC is not running — click the upfront FLC button if it is already lighted (AP must be on to turn it off)
         3) Set your Target ALT using the G1000 dial, or the ALT setting dial on the Center Console/Pedestal — shows VS on its tip of its dial.
         4) Engage the AP — you may do this using the AP engage button on the Jets’ Center Console/Pedestal, or the G1000 AP button. (be sure to have the TURN dial on 3 or the AP will not engage)
         5) Manually throttle up or down to your desired airspeed
         6) Click the G1000 FLC button (again a reminder, NOT the Jet’s AP-FLC button!)
         7) The G1000 will snap its speed bug to your current airspeed.
What happens next is a matter of how much energy the jet has to climb/descend, your current alt, and the target alt.
The G1000 will maintain the airspeed bug, and attempt to climb/descend based on its energy.
Change in the climb and descent can either be quick or slow — it is the G1000 instrument doing its thing. The AirSim3D team has not touched this code/modified its functioning.
You can increase or decrease the throttle, and the G1000 will pitch up or down to try to again capture the bug it set at the beginning of the process.
Remember, as you fly the FLC using the G1000, its important that YOU manage power so the instrument can work. There is no Auto throttle to do this work.

As an example, if you are flying 220 kts at 20,000 and want to FLC down to 10,000, and you keep the throttles where they are, the Jet will merrily fly straight and level/not descend.. why? well its flying 220kts (its speed bug) and if it pitches down, it will speed up and go faster than its speed bug, so it won’t pitch down. So in this case you have to reduce power so speed decreases, then the jet will be able to pitch down, and as it does, it will therefore speed up by the amount it pitches down to equal/maintain the bug.
When flying in REALISTIC PANEL, and an FLC is executed, realistically, and exclusively it uses the G1000 instrument only.
A Pseudo-METHOD to FLC without having to set the ALT in the G1000 is by using the FD Nose up or Nose down buttons — the jet will follow the FD as you manage speed, (but be aware, the jet will not stop descending or climbing without Pilot intervention, and WILL blow past any Target ALT set)

2) FLC in AUGMENTED PANEL in BOTH XP11 & IN XP12:
In this mode you will FLC using the Jet’s AP-FLC button! (NOT the G1000 FLC button!!)
Do not mix the two.


To set and run an FLC experience in AUGMENTED MODE:
         1) Ensure the G1000’s FLC is not engaged (use the top half pop out to see there is no green FLC flag in its warning area — if you see a green FLC in the G1000’s window, disengage the G1000 FLC using the G1000 FLC button.) Then close the G1000 pop out.
         2) Set your target ALT using the AUGMENTED PANEL’s ALT SEL dial on the Dashboard, or the ALT dial on the Center Console/Pedestal (labeled VS), or the G1000’s Alt dial
         3) Engage the AP using the AP engage button on AP-Augmented Panel, the AP-Engage button on the Center Console/Pedestal, or the G1000’s AP button. (BE SURE to have the TURN dial on 3 or the Ap will not engage)
         4) IF you are using the Augmented mode’s AT, set the speed bug using the AT “S” dial. or if not using AT, then you will need to throttle up and down to maintain the FLC speed you desire in the upcoming FLC action.
         5) Engage the FLC button on the front dashboard (Reminder, NOT THE G1000 FLC — again, do not mix the two!) 
         6) The jet will now pitch up or down to begin travelling to the ALT set.
                  IF you have AT on, the jet will automatically maintain the speed bug.
                  If you are NOT using AT, YOU MUST throttle up or down manually to maintain whatever airspeed speed you desire.
                  If the jet gets too slow, the AP may disengage for flight safety. This is normal. You should NEVER see the AOA DIAL needle in the Red/Yellow area.
         7) If the difference between the current and target ALT is great, the jet pitches up/down aggressively (may be up to 12%) to get to the target ALT quickly
                  As with using power to adjust rate in the G1000 scenario, in the Augmented mode FLC engagement too, the amount of power/energy available to the jet plays a very important role:
                  7a) If you give the jet enough power/energy and the Current-to-Target ALT difference is great, it will get going to its target ALT quickly. This is by design.
                  7b) But if you give it low power while in FLC, the jet will (obviously) have a slower climb rate but at some point it will stall if there is not enough power, and if that happens, it will disengage the AT and pitch down to speed up and and overcome the instable situation you have caused with low power. This is by design.
         8 ) When the difference between the Current and Target ALT is great (and assuming the jet is powered adequately) the jet will climb fast, but as it begins to near the target ALT (and this is not as sudden as 300 ft diff) it will gradually lower the pitch so that it gently settles at the blue target ALT
         9) when it nears the target ALT, the FLC will turn off, and the ALT button will automatically engage… you have arrived without any discomfort to your passengers.
         10) BUT (there are always these buts :)) — IF you are approaching your target ALT at high speeds, then expect SOME yo-yoing through the ALT bug as the jet is designed to not overload G’s — so it may take some cycles to settle in.. this is normal.
         11) Another FLC?
                  11a) Disengage ALT
                  11b) Change Target ALT
                  11c) Engage FLC
                  11d) if on AT, speed is managed automatically, if not then manually adjust throttles as needed to maintain the desired speed bug.
We strongly recommend the you avoid using the the G1000’s FLC function, and instead use the C-560XL’s custom AP-FLC (and the rest of its upfront AP-function buttons)
Get back to the INDEX

G1000:

The C-560XL in X-Plane 11 and 12 is equipped with the default X-PLANE G1000 instrument.
There is no FMC in this model. Why? Please read this. or watch our Tour#2: The Cockpit and Cabin on our YT channel for an honest discussion on this topic, and more importantly WHY we chose what we did.
And there are no plans to remove it and replace it with an FMC.
We are not going to debate this, and if this is the only purchase criteria for not flying this 95% authentic, 99.9% bug free aircraft, then this is sadly not the right aircraft for your flying pleasure, and we are peace with that.

Moving on: To fly a route, you must load your flight plans by using the G1000’s Flight Plan loading functions (or create an FP with that instrument) 
Clicking the top half of the G1000 instrument on the dashboard pops out the G1000 PFD; clicking the lower half pops out the G1000 MFD.
Both pop outs can run simultaneously, and these are both X Plane’s default G1000 pop outs provided as-is with no custom code.
The G1000 instrument on the dashboard IS customized to be able to work with the custom AP and clicking its functions are integrated with the custom AP. For example, the FLC button activated the jets Custom FLC, not the default G1000 FLC.
Please refer to LR’s G1000 documentation for loading and interpreting G1000 annunciation and operations.
G1000 IN XP12:
In XP12 LR changed the rules for using their G1000 integration in (all) aircraft.
They now REQUIRE a specific type of AP to be used when an author choses to use the G1000 in all aircraft.
If this is not done, then pilots see missing G1000 annunciators and unstable/unpredictable/broken AP functions — and the forums are full of complaints about how this has broken existing aircraft implementations.
So it is what it is, and as a Mandalorian would conclude: “This is the way!”

That said, this new rule has NO impact on the C-560XL’s custom Auto Pilot (AP), PFD, and MFD.
They all functions exactly like the real jet.
And we strongly encourage you to use C-560XL’s custom instruments and NOT the G1000 EXCEPT in these 3 specific cases:
Use the G1000 to:
1) Load /change flight plans
2) Set up and fly a descent VNAV profile (see the section below: How to Fly an ADF, VOR APR or GPS/G1000-VNAV routes in the C-560XL / DESCENDING/VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV))
3) Maybe, view things like terrain, airports etc.

Other than that we strongly recommend forgetting the G1000 and instead using:
a) the aircrafts custom PFD and its realistic annunciation integrated with the aircrafts Auto Pilot(AP)
b) its custom Auto Pilot (AP) to fly all flight Nav and profile functions
c) the AUTO THROTTLE (AT) when in Augmented panel mode (see REAL, AUGMENTED modes for more)
d) the realistic Flight Director (buttons)
e) the custom FPV
f) and the custom MFD to view terrain (TERR) , stations, and weather radar (WX)
g) the jets custom Radios to set COMM and NAV stations

G1000 Pan:
The MFD map can be pan in XP12 L, R, Up or Down and also Centered.
If you find the G1000 map stuck and not moving, that’s not a bug but by design as it is locked in place.
To Move and/or Unlock the G1000 map:
In the 3D object on the panel:
** To unlock the map, move the cursor to the center of the RANGE dial and when the cursor is a hand, click.
** Once unlocked, and to move the map, then reposition the cursor to the desired pan arrow direction to see the cursor change to a directional arrow, and click as many times as desired to move the map in the pan direction chosen.
If using the G1000 popup:
** Click the center of the RANGE dial to ensure it is unlocked
** Then “Palm” the hand cursor over the Pan arrows to move the map in the desired direction. Yeah — those regions are really small, but sorry, XP does not allow customization of the G1000 popout.

Setting Reference Speeds

If you are familiar with FMC-governed flight, pilots might assume that this aircraft must also require the setting of reference speeds.
Set aside those assumptions. This aircraft is not an airliner, is different, and does not have an FMC.

So how do Pilots know what speed to fly in the C-560XL?

First and for context, we would normally rely on the G1000 to be the input point for setting and editing reference speeds since its our primary flight planning instrument.
HOWEVER, since the G1000 has a long-standing bug that does not allow the setting of reference speeds, and during the XL’s development, we recognized that we had to provide some sort of workaround, which have frankly resulted in not-so-real-life-accurate PFD user experience.

OK — so with that background, the “not-so-real-life-accurate PFD user experience” we just mentioned is that in the real jet, there are no “barber poles” that you see in our sim model’s PFD.
But, since we can not set reference speeds with the Flight planning instrument that SHOULD be providing realistic speed tape markers (using the G1000 TMR/REF soft keys) we added the BP’s as a visual reference for pilots to know (at a minimum) what “range” they can safely fly the jet given its flap configuration and other settings.

The first thing you will notice (which is actually accurate in real-life too) is that when you introduce flaps 1 on the ground for take off, as part of the CHECKLISTS routine, you will see the following reference speeds:
V1
R — Rotate
V2
E — Egress speed references displayed in the PFD.
and that “list” disappears over 45kts, to be replaced with those actual reference speed markers on the speed tape.

So you may now ask.. “but how can I edit them given my weight, density alt, and other factors normally used for speed ref calculations as is done in (old outdated) FMC systems??
Well you can’t. At least not for now and until XP fixes the G1000 bug to allow REF SPEED inputs.

But, don’t despair:
      1) There we have added a bunch of speed markers and other instrument references to look out for to triangulate and help you fly safely. (assuming you are not falling out of the sky from poor ANTI ICE management, then all bets are off)
      2) EVEN IF you could edit the ref speeds to conform to the AFM take off numbers, they would be somewhere within the barber pole limits we had added to the PFD.
      3) Additionally and more importantly, when you are at different flap settings, you will see either GREEN (for Flaps 1, 2) or BLACK (Flaps 3) markers on the speed tape. You should aim for those reference speeds while at those various flap settings, because…
      4) … Flying those ref markers (or very close to them) will give you GREEN AOA ROUNDELS which only happen when the airspeed, configuration and angle of attack create safe flight conditions, all of which ARE faithfully modeled.
      5) You can avoid over speeding the aircraft when you see the red line creep down from the top of the speed take to the current speed. And that IS modeled accurately to provide guidance at various altitudes.
      6) You should also notice that as the flaps increase, the safe aircraft-speed “band” that can be flown, shrinks. This is in keeping with the speeds that the CUSTOM 560 XLS AIRFOILS dictate, and which the wing design develops.
      7) Don’t get too hung up on “the numbers”. Instead fly the jet to the references we mentioned above that are provided in the PFD.
            7a) Know that if for example you are max loaded out with passengers and fuel, your actual references do not change all that much, even in the real thing, because of the fantastic airfoil and wing design.
            7b) Watch the AOA gauge. Do not fly with the needle in the upper half. And that instrument DOES have weight and speed modeling in it, so the heaver and slower you are, the faster you will need to fly to keep the Aircraft Angle of attack within safe limits (the lower half). And yes, that means needing to fly faster than the aforementioned green and black markers, but that won’t be by much. The first rule is to always fly the aircraft as it needs to be flown safely.
      8) Finally, its more important to remember that heaver you are, the LONGER it will take to get the aircraft to the speeds you need (longer take off rolls, higher stall speeds etc.) So the jet will behave differently at different speeds. But again, your reference speeds will not change much, its just the POWER needed to achieve the reference speeds will be different — more power in the “heavy” case (thanks to the jets custom airfoils)

How to Fly an ADF, VOR APR or GPS/G1000-VNAV routes in the C-560XL

Summary: To navigate from point to point, you have a 5 navigation options to choose from. Each is fun and challenging to try!
      1) Dead reckoning — Figuring out your location on a map to then deciding on a “reckoned” Heading to get to where you want to go. Wind and weather have a great affect on such Heading decision-making.
             How does one fly a course using dead reckoning?
                           Set the VOR station selector (SEL) V-1
                           Tune the Radio NAV 1 to any VOR station where you see the VOR display in the lower half of the PFD and (hopefully the DME) “come alive”
                           — saying “hopefully” because not all VOR’s broadcast distance.
                           Change the CRS1 dial so the green needles in the HSI center and point TO the VOR1 station.
                           Note the BACK COURSE on the VOR1 dial from the Station to the jet, and the DME distance
                           Then tune the Radio NAV 2 to any different VOR station it picks up on NAV2… set the VOR station selector to SELECT V-2
                           Change the CRS2 dial so the green needles in the HSI center and point to the VOR2 station,
                           Note the BACK COURSE on the VOR2 dial from the Station to the jet, and the DME distance
                           Use a map trace the BACK COURSES data FROM the 2 NAV stations
                           Where they intersect is where the Jet is currently located
                           Once you know where you are on the map, then decide what course heading you need to fly to get to the point on your map you need to get to.
                           You can then continue to use this simple method of triangulation, periodically taking readings and back-course tracing to the 2 VOR stations you tuned to in earlier steps to verify that you are headed in the direction you wish to fly!

The is the way the “old guys” used to fly when there was no GPS, and when flying directly to and from VOR NAV aids was not practical for a given flight — like, what if there was a Mountain range they could not go over and so had to plot a course to fly around it? Fun stuff!

      2) Tuning the Radio to an ADF station:
                           Set the EFIS panel (location is dependent on REAL AUGM panel mode setup) dial Labeled NAV1, to ADF, then fly the yellow directional needles’ direction.
                           Word to the wise here — its very easy to “spiral” around an ADF station since there is no lateral nav information.
                           This gets all the more critical as you get near the station!
                           If you find yourself constantly turning in one direction to try to keep the needle centered, and not getting any closer, you are probably flying in circles around the station, not to it.
                           In this case make a more aggressive turn to the point where the ADF needle starts to move in the OPPOSITE direction — that shows the nose is now more pointed at/to the station.               
                           Generally its pointless to try to fly an ADF precision path once within 5 – 10 miles of the station.
                           Most ADF stations in the world (and in X Plane too) are being retired/shut down. Their days are numbered. But, they are a fun challenge to find and fly.

      3) Flying to and from a VOR station
                           a) Tune the RMU to an in-range VOR nav station
                           b) SELECT NAV 1 or 2 from the EFIS BUTTONS (in REAL mode)
                           c) OR select VOR-1 or VOR-2 using the SELECT dial in AUMG mode
                           d) Set the the aforementioned dial in the ADF point above LEFT to NAV1 (or RIGHT dial to NAV2) to see the Horizontal deviation needles in the HSI
                           e) Set the CRS desired by using the CRS Dials in the EFIS panels
                           f) Fly towards the Horizontal deviation needles in the HSI (in the lower half of the PFD)
                           g) If the station is in range, then you could also fly to the station using the Auto Pilot’s NAV function. But be careful; Always fly to these radials ~45 degrees (or less). If you are approaching the CRS radial set at steeper angles, then set the Jets TURN to higher rates of turn to allow the AP to fly the jet more aggressively to turn and capture the CRS. But that said, if you want to fly realistically, then obey the Bank angle rules to set the TURN to LOW above 10,000 ALT and approach the CRS radial <45 degrees. Plan it so your legs do not have crazy leg-change angles!

      4) Flying a precision approach using an ILS-enabled VOR station
                           a) Tune the ILS station and approach course as you would an VOR station outlined in 3) above
                           b) You will then approach the horizontal line at an angle < 45 degrees — this is critical. The higher the intercept angle, the LOWER the chance of the jet being able to turn and capture the Localizer!
                           c) CRITALLY also, you MUST ALSO approach the GLIDESLOPE (GS) from BELOW the glide slope (GS) line in the HSI instrument
                           d) Generally ILS station activation is limited to a ~25-30 Mile range
                           e) When a-d are satisfied, turn the AP ON, and then engage the APR button, and also turn ALT on — this will keep the jet flying level
                           f) Once GS is in range — you’ll see the Pink diamonds in the PFD and the Horizontal VNAV bar in the HSI drift downward to the center, ALT will click off and GS will engage automatically and the jet will begin to track the GS downward — with the appropriate annunciations showing in the top section of the PFD.
                           f) Be aware: ILS approaches demand precise flap and airspeed management for the AP to follow the GS precisely (see also this topic on Angle of Attack (AOA) instrument interpretations.

      5) Flying a GPS-enabled HNAV and VNAV Flight Plan:
          To do this, you will first need to create a flight plan (we like Little Nav), and load it into the G1000 — there are many online help vid for this, so won’t repeat here.

CLIMBING: There is no automatic ascent VNAV in the C-560XL.
To climb, set: Target ALT (ALT Select dial) and to climb to it you have a choice of:
         i) ENGAGE AP, SET VS to FPM desired to achieve pitch desired. Watch Airspeed to obey flap and AOA/no-stall requirements
         ii) or, after engaging AP, click FLC and the jet will climb to the targeted ALT. Watch Airspeed to obey flap and AOA/no-stall requirements
In both cases, once the Jet reaches ALT, the ALT function will turn on and the aircraft will level off at the targeted ALT.
If needed, then set your next targeted ALT, then use either method above to reach your target ALT
Either method can be used to CLIMB or DESCENT (if not engaging VNAV)

HORIZONTAL NAVIGATION (HNAV): This is not unlike flying 3, 4 above, except, the waypoint is driven from the GPS flight plan (no radio tuning is necessary, the G1000 does that as each leg is flown by the AP)
AP APR must be ON to fly the HNAV plan.
CAUTION: When high and fast, or in gusty weather, and when TURN is restricted to 3, or better to LOW to avoid BANK ANGLE alerts, then if the offset angle between legs is higher than 30o you can expect the jet to NOT fly the leg-route precisely — in this case, expect some meandering/wobbling to the left and right of the leg CRS, or a longer arc to transition to the next crs radial. This is normal. The larger the angular difference is between waypoints, the slower you will need to fly IF TURN is restricted to LOW, and if you want path-flying precision. (especially if you have restricted airspace on wither side of your flight path.

DESCENDING/VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV)
For this you will use the AP VNAV, then switch to the AP’s APR once at the FAF (final approach fix — a part of all STAR approaches) of your flight plan.
There are some very critical things to monitor and do when executing a VNAV descent, so precision, timing and focus is required (Like any real pilot experiences).
         1) To begin, you must have a valid Flight Plan (FP) loaded into the G1000. There are many videos online showing how to do this, so won’t repeat those steps here.
         2) SELECT GPS in the HSI selector. You should now see the FP track in the G1000, and Needles guidance in the PFD’s (lower half) HSI section. IN XP12 the flight track is no longer displayed in the MFD if not using an FMC — this is how X Plane is designed. The “magenta line” in the MFD has been removed.
         3) To begin so the Approach (APR) can fly the HNAV portion of the FP, you MUST ACTIVATE a leg in the FP in the G1000, AND ALSO “designate” — change the white ALTs in the FP, to be BLUE for ALL the ALTs you want the VNAV to descend to in the G1000 Flight Plan; Please refer to the LR manual for their G1000 functionality on how to do this. You must do this prior to flying the leg. We recommend you do this in the flight-planning phase before the start of the flight, when the aircraft is on the ground. When you do it is up to you, but you MUST have the descent waypoints designated Blue, or descent VNAV will not work.

         4) At least 5 min before the Top of Descent (TOD) on the FP, when your descent profile begins:
                  a) DISCONNECT the AP ALT function. Provided the jet was in stable and level flight, the AP will continue to fly level at the ALT
                  b) LOWER the ALT target to be below the airport you intend to land at (Or at least lower than the next VNAV profiled BLUE altitude target)
                  c) Click the AP VNAV Button. If you do not see a WHITE VNAV annunciation in the PFD annunciator strip, click the AP VNAV Button again until you do see WHITE VNAV — this shows the VNAV system is now Armed. If not properly Armed, VNAV will not work.

         5) When the VNAV is armed, the jet may continue to fly level. This is normal since the descent VNAV is not YET ready to initialize. Be patient. When AP has decided that the descent should begin (defined by your speed and the distance to the next descent point) then VNAV will activate and engage and fly the descent correctly. when that happens, the WHITE VNAV annunciation in the PFD changes to GREEN VNAV — the jets nose will lower, ALT begins decreasing, and the AP VNAV descent is now actively flying the jet to the next VNAV BLUE designated ALT
         6) When VNAV reaches its G1000 designated leg blue ALT — and this may happen before the leg is completed — ALT will click ON in the AP, VNAV will turn to WHITE, and the aircraft will level off.
         7) When you see this leveling off in an active VNAV leg, DO NOT turn ALT off. When VNAV becomes active again, ALT will automatically click OFF, and VNAV will turn GREEN (actively flying the VNAV profile) and the jet will descend to the next G1000 designated leg blue ALT (and then level off again, and then repeat the cycle for each G1000 designated leg blue ALT)
         8) If using a STAR, be sure to DESIGNATE any waypoint ALT (make BLUE in the G1000) the FP has set/listed before reaching the FAF
         9) If transitioning from the normal flight plan to a STAR, depending on the tools you used to set up your flight plan before importing it into the G1000, you might have to ACTIVATE the STAR profile’s DESIGNATED BLUE starting waypoint in the G1000 (see 8 above) BEFORE completing the last valid VNAV profile point, before the STAR begins.

         10) Watch for, and once you see the vertical Pink diamonds appear in the PFD once you cross the FAF, you are in the GPSS precision approach leg of the FP.
                  a) Prior to the FAF you should be flying level, and under the GS if the FP was set up correctly
                  b) Once you see the Vertical Pink-diamonds in the PFD, click AP VNAV OFF
                  c) Leave AP ALT ON
                  d) Now click the AP APR button to now begin flying the GPS mode precision LNAV/VNAV approach
                  e) VOR annunciation in the PFD will probably be green at this point (or will soon become once on the Hoz localizer track) and you will see a WHITE GS annunciation in the PFD ahead of the GS being captured

         11) When GS captured, GS annunciation in the PFD turns GREEN, and the jet begins to descent down the GS for a GPS precision approach. From this point, GS (vertical guidance) and Localizer (Horizontal guidance) will be provided by the AP’s APR function exclusively
         12) It now becomes CRITICALLY IMPORTANT to manage FLAPS at their relevant REF AIRSPEEDS in their individual speed brackets on the SPEED TAPE, in order to maintain correct approach Angle of Attack (AO)
         13) Once Gear is down (never exceed 200kts or you will hear very LOUD SLIPSTREAM noises) the AOA INDEXER on the downtube becomes active
         14) Your aim is to fly the REF marker airspeed (horizontal green and black speed markers) for each flap bracket (or a few kts + or – is OK, but also definitely fly higher ASI if in gusty conditions) with Green chevron AOA indexing. Precision flying managing airspeed, AOA, flap requirements and gear-induced drag is essential to keeping the jet on GS. This comes with practice. It IS challenging. The AP will work hard, but you also must help it by managing the jet to correct REF speeds (the horizontal green and black speed markers) about mid-way in each flap bracket in the SPEED TAPES. At any time, if the AP senses the jet is not safe (slow, high AOA) IT WILL DISCONNECT so the nose can drop to avoid a stall. THIS IS BY DESIGN to keep the jet flying safely! You are the PIC, so safe flying is your responsibility. We recommend NOT using the AUTO THROTTLE at this stage — humans can react to power needs faster. It is always better to go around and try again when the approach is not well set up.
         15) In the real world, the C-560XL (all models) are NOT cleared by the FAA to perform AUTOLAND. (It also really does not have an AUTO THROTTLE either). If you wish to fly like real pilots do, then you should disconnect the APR and manually land per these AP-use restrictions.
                  a) If you do not want to defy the FAA, disconnect the AP, and over the RWY gently reduce power at the “40 ft” call out, gently flare by pulling the yoke back. Your goal is to fly onto the ground, not at it). If you balloon (float upward) you are either too fast, or flaring to aggressively. A good landing takes practice. Butter landings are for simmers, but not what real pilots do — it is correct to allow the jet to contact the ground, smartly if needed, especially in wet conditions, so as to not aqua-plane. Once both main gear are down, activate THRUST REVERSERs. <60 kts stow Speed brake, reversers, pull flaps in. Refer to the Checklists (NORM button on the MFD). You have arrived.
                  b) If however, Ms. or Mr. Rebel-I-don’t-like-rules, you wish to fly the jet in on APR all the way down to an Autoland and risk a heavy inquiry/suspension/fine from the FAA, then:
                           i) if you are at green AOA indexer with Flaps 3
                           ii) and ASI is precisely 110kts + – 2kts
                           iii) then when you hear the “50” callout over the runway, chop the throttles to idle, and the jet will flare and AutoLand. It will NOT “butter” the landing. Those are for gaming and likes on FB. It is designed to smartly contact with little bounce to avoid aqua plane-ing. (like real aircraft do)
                  c) With main gear down, the nose will remain elevated — you then need to disconnect the AP, gently lower the nose, maintain RWY CENTER, deploy REVERSERS and SPEEDBRAKES (they are not spoilers) and when <60 stow Reversers/Speed brakes, pull flaps up all the way.

Congratulations you have flown a VNAV profile and AUTOLANDED!
Get back to the INDEX

OTHER FUNCTIONS and CAPABILITIES


SETTING THE SPEED BUG in the G1000 in XP11
If using the Realistic Mode Panel the ability to set the Speed Bug in the traditional sense like when its used by the Auto throttle, obviously goes away, because there is realistically no AUTO THROTTLE in this jet.
In this case the speed bug in the PFD now becomes irrelevant for AUTO THROTTLE jet functionality.
It can however be used as a “reference” marker.
How? By using the G1000’s FLC button… but there is a catch: Since the G1000 is set up to match the jet’s it-has-no-auto throttle-General-Aviation classification model in XP’s Plane Maker, (which this jet belongs to) clicking the G1000’s FLC causes the blue speed bug in the PFD and g1000 to snap to the CURRENT SPEED.
You then have 2 choices:
         a) use the FLC as designed in the G1000 — its as-is, we made no code changes, so please refer to LR’s document.
         b) while in FLC mode, use the Nose up and down arrows on the G1000 to change the speed bug, then turn FLC off (which disappears the G1000 speed bug) — but you have now changed the PFD’s speed bug as a speed reference — and then you can use the throttle manually to manage your airspeed.
Please refer to its online manual published by LR for any further G1000 instructions.

While the G1000’s AP and other buttons have been tested for full integration with the Jets custom AP and other instruments, we strongly recommend that you use the jets own Authentic AP and non-G1000 dials and buttons for a better, and more authentic, C-560XL flight experience immersion.

There is a very narrow, limited, known issue of the SMALL dial of the G1000 pop out’s (ONLY) ALT dial not decreasing ALT: (ALL other places a Pilot can use to change ALT work just fine). Since its so isolated, and we have no access to LR’s pop out code to debug this, and every other place ALT setting works, this is not something we can, or will fix.  Please use any of the other places to change (small) alt numbers  — Augmented panel, Physical G1000 on the dashboard, Center Console/Pedestal — all those ALT dials function perfectly (all using standard LR Datarefs we might add) — so why the pop out small alt does not work, makes no sense to us.

Frankly, except for building or loading prebuilt flight plans, or using the VNAV function of the G1000 in XP11 ONLY, (which the C-560XL team has not touched, and comes straight from the G1000), the C-560XL team pilots generally ignored the G1000 in favor of performing ALL other jet functions with C-560XL AP instruments and pop outs.

Get back to the INDEX


The PFD in AUGMENTED MODE LAYOUT: Set with the switch lower left labeled: REAL/AUG to AUG
A view of the PFD, Pilots side in AUGMENTED MODE:
Notice FD-AP PFD1 display with AP Annunciators (WHITE & GREEN) in the strip above the 3D Artificial Horizon.
AP Panel displayed in Augmented mode, below the RMU, above the standby HSI
Wing Display is set to 1, VOR dialed to Station 1 in the RMU, COM1 is selected to talk to ATC
Auto Throttle (AT Panel) in Augmented mode is not engaged
MFD is set to ARC, in the MAP mode (1 of 6 options)
MODE C is NOT on in the transponder panel Between the RMU dials
Speed bug at 94kts, ALT bug set to 8200, VS selected in AP (white ASEL shows ALT target not captured; or would be GREEN in the PFA’s AP Annunciation strip. FD guiding aircraft to HDG Bug set to 351
Notice the “Wings” Flight Director (FD) Learn more about it here

Custom designed EFIS, AP Panel in AUGMENTED DASHBOARD MODE — just makes flying easier in the sim
In this mode the REAL EFIS, AP, and MFD panels can be also found on the Center Console/Pedestal

The PFDin REALISTIC MODE LAYOUT : Set with the switch lower left labeled: REAL/AUG to REAL
The same view in REALISTIC MODE: (as you would find in the real jet)
FD-AP PFD2 in use
No AP Panel upfront, found only in Center Console/Pedestal between seats
Aircraft Symbol Display 2, GPS mode, COM2 for ATC
No Auto Throttle (AT Panel) in Realistic Mode ; Speed Display option now in Mach
MFD is set to ROSE, in the PLAN mode (1 of 6 options)
MODE C selected, DME now in kms., Clock in Stopwatch Mode, Barograph set to IN
Notice the “CrossPoint” Flight Director (FD) Learn more about it here
.
.

EFIS control Panel in REALISTIC DASHBOARD MODE.
AP, and MFD panels can be also found on the Center Console/Pedestal

Go here for a listing of the PFD Annunciators.

IN XP12: Given the the AP rule changes LR now has in place in XP12, its even more important to forget about using the G1000 for everything except for:
a) loading flight plans
b) Looking at airport maps
c) Setting up for VNAV
and to always only use the jet’s custom AP. More about this change, in the G1000 section.

POP UP Instruments:
3 available: PFD, MFD, G1000
PFD popup is not touch sensitive. Click the PFD face to popup. Moveable, and re-sizeable. Click the PFD face to close. 
MFD: Click MFD face to popup. Moveable, and re-sizeable. Click the MFD face to close.
Only Checklists in the MFD are touch sensitive to help navigate through the checklists. You can change CHECKLISTS in the MFD or in its popup. See CHECKLISTS section above for more.
Use MFD Left panel dial to set Arc or Rose mode, and the inner dial to select one of the 6 sub-modes.
The right dial changes the MFD range.
MFD Mode set by those dials will sync displays in Dash and in Popup.
G1000 instrument on the dashboard. Click top half on dashboard for G1000 PFD; Click Lower half for the G1000 MFD for terrain/maps.
To close the LR popups hover over the top left corner for the red light, click.
PFD/EFIS Control Panel:
The Image above Left displays the AUGMENTED DASHBOARD LAYOUT
         * The PFD control panel (known as the EFIS control panel) is a custom version of the real EFIS control panel, that includes something the real jet does NOT have: An Auto Throttle. In this mode the REALISTIC EFIS control panel is moved to be placed on the Center Console/Pedestal.
         * The array of small dials (WINGS, SELECT, AT, HSI and MODE changes PFD and MFD functions
         * In this mode, to display WIND DATA look for and click the WIND DATA button on the REALISTIC EFIS control panel is now positioned and found down on the Center Console/Pedestal
         * Pressing the HDG PUSH SYNC dial top part in (becomes lighted) with the AP Disconnected turns additional Pitch and Roll Trim alert annunciations on to alert the pilot that the AP is still disengaged. There is NO CHANGE to the HDG Bug. With the AP engaged, pushing that dial will automatically turn the jet to the HGD course set/displayed/listed under HDG in the lower half of the PFD. To change the HDG bug, use and turn the HEADING PUSH SYNC dial.
         * The HSI dial has an inner and outer dial… the inner one changes the 6 MFD sub-modes (APProach, VOR, MAP, NAV, PLAN, 360)
         * The Outer dial change the MFD layout from compass ROSE to ARC layout
         * The Dial under the MODE label does not change the MFD mode (that is by the HSI inner dial mentioned above) — This dial sets MINIMUMS (verbal Call out at the height set, and Yellow lights seen to the Left of the Slip indicator on the PFD)
         * Even while in Augmented mode, the REALISTIC EFIS panel that has moved to the the Center Console/Pedestal, all its buttons continue to function as well
— see the information immediately below for the REALISTIC EFIS Control Panel Button descriptions
         * In this mode, the AP’s VVI wheel, AP engage, Yaw Damper (YD) TURN and LOW functionality is conveniently placed to the right of the PFD, below the RMU. Of note, the REALISTIC AP panel remains on the Center Console/Pedestal, and continues to remain fully functional
         * And finally, notice also that the CRS and HD panel has an added ALT setting dial for easier ALT setting. Again, those REALISTIC placed dials continue to display and function on the Center Console/Pedestal.


The Image above Right displays the REALISTIC DASHBOARD LAYOUT which is the real jets control paneling. In this mode:
         * The Augmented, custom EFIS controller, is replaced by the REALISTIC EFIS controller (and disappears from the Pilot side-Center Console/Pedestal)
         * Pressing the HDG PUSH SYNC dial top part in (becomes lighted) with the AP disengaged OR engaged realistically just snaps the HGD bug to the jet current heading. That’s all. The AP HDG is NOT automatically engaged (as in the case in the AUG mode). To change the HDG bug, use and turn the HEADING PUSH SYNC dial.
         * IN REALISTIC NODE, you will set MINIMUMS in the G1000, or using the MINIMUMS dial on the Center Console just aft of the AP panel. Please use this LR document, (search for Minimums) to learn to set minimums in the G1000
         * The 7 Buttons in the panel change and set options to display in the PFD — try them out!
         * The smaller dials underneath them display NAV 1 or 2 relative DIRECTION — single white arrow pointing to the tuned Nav1 station, and a double white arrow showing relative bearing to that station from the current jet position. These DO NOT set which VOR channel is being displayed in the HSI — that is set by using the big Button Labeled NAV1 and NAV2 between the GPS and WIND DATA buttons on the PFD controller.
         * NOTE: Only one set of VOR (Green) needles can be displayed in the HSI at a time.
         * There is only one ADF, so both dials that click to point to ADF serve the same purpose to display the single ADF directional needle (Amber) in the HSI
         * Pressing the HDG PUSH SYNC dial will snap the HDG bug to the current HDG, HDG AP function ON, and the jet will turn to the HGD course that is set/displayed/listed under HDG in the lower half of the PFD. To change the HDG bug, turn the HDG PUSH SYNC dial.
EFIS PANEL BUTTONS:
         * ARC / ROSE changes the HSI display in the MFD in certain Sub Modes (Change the MFD Sub modes using the dial on the MFD CONTROL PANEL)
         * SPEED / MACH Change the PFD speed-target from KTS to MACH
         * AIRCRAFT SYMBOL 1 & 2 Displays a change in symbols in the PFD
         * IN / HPA Changes Barometer reading options. Click the dial to the right of the IN / HPA button on the PFD to change to STD Baro readings
         * WIND DATA turns wind direction and speed display
         * NAV 1 / 2 changes PDF and DME NAV-station focus (assuming a tuned NAV station)
         * GPS shows GPS route in MFD (Assuming a valid Flight plan has been entered in the G1000)
Get back to the INDEX

SELECTING VOR/GPS AP NAVIGATION SOURCES:
         * In AUGMENTED MODE use the SELECT dial to choose what the AP will follow — VOR1, 2, or GPS. You can only fly 1 NAV source at a time.
         * In REALISTIC MODE, use the BUTTONS marked “NAV1-underscore-NAV2” left of the PFD, to choose a NAV source.
            Push or scroll the GPS Button to choose it as a source (usually for Horizontal Nav Flight plan flying.
            The chosen button lights up and casts glow.

You can only use one NAV source at a time.

VNAV?
Read this
. The jet uses the G1000 for its descent VNAV functionality.
IN XP12: Given the the AP rule changes LR now has in place in XP12, its even more important to forget about using the G1000 for everything except for loading flight plans, and to always use the jet’s custom AP. More about this change, in the G1000 section.
SELECTING VOR/GPS AP NAVIGATION DIRECT-TO NEEDLES:
In addition to displaying VOR HOZ and VERT needles (APR Vertical and Horizontal Nav only when tuned to an ILS station) (sourced above), the HSI (the round dial displayed in the lower half of the PFD) can also display ADF, VOR1 and 2 DIRECT-TO-STATION POINTERS.
Do not confuse these with the NAV/GPS needles (Above)
VOR1 DIRECT-TO-STATION pointer display is a single-line white needle
VOR2 DIRECT-TO-STATION pointer display is a double-line white needle
ADF pointer is a single-line yellow needle
All 3 — Nav 1 and 2 and ADF needles, can be displayed at the same time (very useful for waypoint triangulation!)
Selecting ADF will change the DME to ADF distance Data automatically (if the station is broadcasting the data).
There is only 1 set of VOR1, 2 and ADF nav equipment on the jet, so both Pilot and Co Pilot dials change the same pointers in both sides of the HSI and DME instruments.
Both dials can be used to change to (the single) ADF nav mode.
What stations these needles point to is defined by what VOR stations the RADIO is tuned to.
Once ADF is chosen for a dial, you must then cycle that dial back off, and then back on, to display its VOR needle.

         * In AUGMENTED MODE look at the Center Console/Pedestal pilot side, and find and turn the small dial in the top panel, top left, labeled OFF, NAV1, ADF for NAV1 to set NAV1 direct-to needle displays in the HSI instrument.
Similarly use the dial to its right labeled OFF, NAV2, ADF to to set NAV2 direct-to needle displays in the HSI instrument.
ADF use the SELECT DIAL to choose what the AP will follow — VOR1, 2, or GPS. You can only fly 1 source at a time.

         * In REALISTIC MODE, use the same dials and logic, but now just 1 panel will be displayed on the upfront panel to the left of the PFD on the Pilot side.
THE 3 Big square buttons (vertically laid out in AUG mode and Horizontally in REAL mode):
APU GEN OFF: Lights up when the APU is on, but its GENS are still offline
FD/ AP FD 1 and 2: Scroll or click this button to change the Flight Director options. Its “one way” only. (can’t go backwards)
FD 1 and 2 Display arrows in the PFD annunciator strip to show to which FD is coupled to the Flight guidance system button
MFD CONTROL PANEL:
Only one panel… copilot side Center Console/Pedestal.
Buttons and selection options are synced to the buttons on the MFD instrument bezel on the front dashboard,
MOST important is the large dial for MFD POWER Labeled Off, SG1, NORM, SG2.
“SG1 & SG2” are not power settings options (normal to think that since they are on the power dial). They are 2 “Symbol Generator” backups for the PFD — so in cast the Symbols in the PFD conk out, the pilot has 2 backup generators to restore them. This is not modeled in the aircraft.
To send power to the MFD, turn the dial to NOT be OFF.
TERRAIN (TERR) AND WEATHER (WXR) Radar
MFD power must be on for radars to work.
Radar On/Off controlled by separate WXR and TERR labeled buttons when using the MFD on the dashboard, on its bezel, and their range using the dial on the Right labeled RNG
OR, use the MFD controller on the Center Console/Pedestal, WX TERR button, to cycle them through to off. Be patient with these radars, then may take up to 15 seconds to “power up” and display in the MFD.
You can not have Terrain and Weather displaying at the same time by design.
Radars show on the MFD only by design.
WXR is not a “map of the clouds in front of the aircraft”.
It ONLY displays “inclement weather” what pilots should try to avoid, RED being the most turbulent/dangerous.
So if you see a solid bank of clouds in front of you, but nothing on the WXR, that’s not a bug; it simply means that the WX ahead is just not inclement or turbulent enough for the Doper to register on the scope.
FLIGHT DIRECTORS (FD)(this is relevant as of Jan 2024 — things may change as XP12 beta changes, and if they do, this section will be updated)

COMMONIN XP11 and XP12
1) The C-560XL displays 2 types of custom FD’s annunciations in the PFD that can be accessed from the same button labeled FD/AP PFD 1 FD/AP PFD 2.
Click the button to see the 2 modes.(Wings and CrossPoint– both have slightly different behaviors)
2) The AP button engages the FD in the G1000 popup automatically. There will be no FD visual in the main PFD at this stage without first clicking FD/AP PFD 1 FD/AP PFD 2. This is by design to help declutter the PFD.
3) To view either one of the custom FDs in the PFD, you’ll need to then click the FD/AP PFD 1 and FD/AP PFD 2 button.
4) The FD (As well as the AP) can only be engaged/turned on once airborne. Typically, real C-560XL pilots turn the AP on and off at about 1000 ft AGL after take off or before landing. The real aircraft is not certified for, and does therefore not have the capability to AutoLand, BUT HOWEVER, AutoLand IS an option we provide in the Sim version of this aircraft. Learn more about this custom feature to AutoLand here.
5) When the AP is engaged, the G1000 pop out displays its own FD in the pop out (no CrossPoint available), and that FD can not be turned off without first turning the AP off — this is a feature of the default G1000 pop out, and can not be changed.

FD IN XP11
1) With the AP DISENGAGED, a pilot can look for Vertical or Horizontal navigation with these steps, based on the following conditions:
1a) If flying a GPS route (Assuming the Flight Plan includes HDG and ALT information) ensure that GPS (3) is selected using the SELECT dial in the EFIS panel.
1a1) Then Select NAV in the AP: AP NAV button light will turn on, White LNAV in the PFD status strip
1a1a) If flying the wings FD, turn towards the Wings direction to get on course. This does NOT display Vertical guidance
1a1b) If flying the CrossPoint FD, it will provide guidance for both Horizontal guidance to get to the GPS track, and also Vertical guidance to fly to the intended Altitude target for that way point in the flight plan
2) If flying a non-GPS VOR-station tuned track (HNAV) ensure that 1, or 2 (VOR1 or VOR2) is selected in the SELECT dial in the EFIS panel depending on which VOR station is tuned in the COMM NAV radio.
Non precision VOR navigation is for HORIZONTAL navigation ONLY, no vertical guidance is assumed.
Until the VOR station is “in range”, the FD will provide “straight and level” guidance only, so Pilots must first manually fly a heading needed to get to be in range, and also to intercept the VOR course in The TO direction only UNTIL the VOR station is “in range” — typically this will be determined by the power of the station, and also factors like aircraft altitude and distance or how abeam the aircraft is to the station.
There are many tutorials on how to intercept and fly VOR course tracks online, so won’t repeat those here.
Once the VOR radio is “in range” (you will see the VOR card align to the course radial set with the set to the course from the CRS1 or CRS2 dials, Morse sounds if available, and the Arrows in the VOR instrument (lower half PFD) pointing TO the station — hopefully you are not backtracking away from it or the arrows will point FROM the station) ONLY THEN click the AP NAV button, and then the FD will switch to provide LNAV guidance to get you to the VOR track selected in the VOR.
3) If flying a Precision Approach (ILS) course — so in this case as in 2) above the VOR is tuned to a station that provides both Localizer and Glide Slope beams, Follow everything i 2 above EXCEPT that when the VOR is in range (displaying both the LOC and GS needles in the VOR, and pink diamonds in the PFD, then the Pilot will click the APT ap button. It is strongly advised to use the CROSSPOINT FD option when flying a Precision approach (without the AP engaged) so as to get both vertical AND horizontal Flight guidance.

Flying non-AP-FD-assisted-navigation can be challenging, and the danger here is to get fixated and stare at the PFD to try to constantly stay on course; but practice good situational awareness by not forgetting to look also look outside and at other flight-critical instruments too!!
A more challenging task is to turn the FD’s off — and just use the VOR needles, and/or the pink diamonds in the PFD, to fly the Approach. Thy that at night. And then add crosswind. Very challenging!

2) With the AP ENGAGED and with no other AP function engaged, the AP will automatically level-wings the aircraft BUT CAUTION: it will CONTUNUE to MAINTAIN whatever PITCH the aircraft is flying, at the moment the AP was engaged. This is by design, and its then up to the pilot to use other AP functions to fly the aircraft. PRO TIP: The quickest way to get the aircraft to fly pitch-level is to engage ALT — that will stop the climb or descent, and the AP will fly the aircraft towards the ALTITUDE it was set to at the moment the ALT was engaged. (notice the Green ALT annunciation in the AP STATUS strip in the top part of the PFD to show AP ALT is engaged) Notice that you will NOT see the ALTITUDE BUG (blue) at the point the ALT was engaged. It will remain at the altitude indicated by the altitude TARGET (blue lettering) seen in the small window at the top of the Altitude Tape. This is changed by the EFIS panel’s ALT SEL -PUSH SYNC dial.
2a) To then get to that altitude target, refer to the AP function buttons and its operations in this topic Auto Pilot Function Buttons: HERE.
Once AP functions are engaged, then whether flying GPS, VOR or ILS approaches, the AP takes direction from the FD’s and the pilots task is then to simply observe and monitor to make sure all is well.
Note that it is NOT necessary to have the FD servos engaged (on) for the AP it function.
FD IN XP12
Given the AP rule changes LR now has in place in XP12, its even more important to forget about using the G1000 for everything except for loading flight plans, and to always use the jet’s custom AP. More about this change, in the G1000 section.
And due to those rule changes made by the sim in XP12 WRT the use of Custom Autopilots + the use of instruments like the G1000 (which has its own AP, which while it is fully functional in the aircraft we STRONGLY discourage using the G1000 in favor of using the AUTHENTIC C-560XL AP), note that:
1) With the AP DISENGAGED, turning on the FD for either FD-types will simply point the pilot directions towards a stable LEVEL FLIGHT STATE ONLY. The FD in the disengaged AP scenario provides no Lateral or Horizontal flight guidance (as it did in the XP11 version of the aircraft as noted in the previous paragraphs) This is a result of the new rules the Sim imposed to try to force the use of the G1000 AP, but since we have a highly CUSTON C-560XL AP, the FD in the disconnected state now only points towards Pitch and Lateral stability. If you want a more authentic FD behavior, sorry, you’ll want to fly the XP11 version of the aircraft.
2) With the AP ENGAGED, and with no other AP function engaged, the AP will automatically level-wings the aircraft BUT CAUTION: it will CONTUNUE to MAINTAIN whatever PITCH the aircraft is flying, at the moment the AP was engaged. This is by design, and its then up to the pilot to use other AP functions to fly the aircraft. PRO TIP: The quickest way to get the aircraft to fly pitch-level is to engage ALT — that will stop the climb or descent, and the AP will fly the aircraft towards the ALTITUDE it was set to at the moment the ALT was engaged. (notice the Green ALT annunciation in the AP STATUS strip in the top part of the PFD to show AP ALT is engaged) Notice that you will NOT see the ALTITUDE BUG (blue) at the point the ALT was engaged. It will remain at the altitude indicated by the altitude TARGET (blue lettering) seen in the small window at the top of the Altitude Tape. This is changed by the EFIS panel’s ALT SEL -PUSH SYNC dial.
2a) To then get to that altitude target, refer to the AP function buttons and its operations in this topic Auto Pilot Function Buttons: HERE.
Once AP functions are engaged, then whether flying GPS, VOR or ILS approaches, the AP takes direction from the FD’s and the pilots task is then to simply observe and monitor to make sure all is well.
Note that it is NOT necessary to have the FD servos engaged (on) for the AP it function.
Get back to the INDEX 

AP STATUS ANNUNCIATORS in the PFD’s top Annunciator section:
All AP-Status annunciators are visible in the top section/panel in the PFD and are faithfully replicated to true-life and based on the real POH. 
White lettering is for an AP function turned on by one of the AP strip buttons, but not captured.
Green is an indication of being, or when, active/captured.

The PFD Annunciator panel displays:

LATERAL FUNCTION PFD ANNUNCIATORS

  • HDG — always green since the AP begins work to get to Course HDG dialed, immediately
  • VOR and LNAV — Both White while AP NAV function is engaged but the VOR has not yet been captured (for the VOR station and course needles set). Green VOR, White LNAV when captured.
  • LOC — White when used in the APR function, then the Lateral VOR needle is not captured, Green when captured. (see also the associated GS annunciator in the VERTICAL section)
  • BC — for Back Course VOR Tracking. VOR and LNAV white until Needle capture, then VOR Green. See the IMPORTANT set up note in the AP function above for the BC button

VERTICAL FUNCTION PFD ANNUNCIATORS

  • ALT — Green when ALT bug has been captured
  • ASEL — White while VS is engaged, and ALT has not been captured; Replaced with Green ALT once ALT bug is captured
  • GS — White until the Glideslope is captured, triggered when APR function is used, and VOR tuned to an ILS station
  • FLC — While while FLC is engaged, then replaced with Green ALT when ALT bug is captured.
  • VNAV — White VNAV when used with VNAV, then Green when captured
  • VS — White ASEL when VS function is engaged with ALT set, and VVI Dial is set in the direction needed for the jet to travel to the ALT set. Replaced with green ALT when ALT bug is captured

AUTOPILOT STATUS PFD ANNUNCIATORS:

  • AP OFF / AP ENG — Yellow alert when turned off with Horn; then Green AP ENG when on (See 2 Critical conditions for AP engagement above)
  • YD OFF — Yellow alert if the Yaw damper is turned off. Disappears when the YD is on.
  • TEST — Red TEST alert displayed (all other annunciators removed) when the PFD is in TEST mode when engaged by pressing on the Test dial on the PFD control panel (Center Console/Pedestal)

OVERSPEED
You may hear and see overspeed sound and visual clues in the PFD Horizon area, and/or in the SPEED TAPES as follows:
         1) < 8,000 ALT, a red warning marker is positioned on the speed tape at 260 kts +.
         2) Above 304 kts , Overspeed beep alert sound
         3) Between 8,000 – 26,500 ALT, red warning marker is positioned on the speed tape at 309 kts +
         3) > 26,500 switch to MACH Speeds. No red Speed tape marker, only Sound warnings as:
                  > 0.75 mach Beep sound
                  > 0.76 MAX SPEED VISUAL in PFD Horizon window

Remedy: You are flying too fast for your ALT; Open the SPEEDBRAKES, reduce THROTTLES and slow down until the warnings are not heard, or seen.


PS HEATER AND AOA HEATER ANNUNCIATORS
These display when the Pitot and Static switch is OFF.
However, if improperly configured for takeoff, they may also Light if the Switch is on, but the annunciators will turn off once airborne.
They will light solid if the No takeoff is lighted, and if N1 is above 35 and on the ground that will change them to Blink (N1 too high for ground ops) Throttle back <35 to correct condition.
NO TAKEOFF 

This is one of 90 possible Annunciators on the 42-panel upfront Annunciator panel, showing the Ground Idle and No Take Off Annunciator

To correct No Take Off conditions and have a clean annunciator panel, except ground idle:
At a minimum, Flaps >= 7 deg 
Ideally per the checklists ALSO:
Fuel boost must be ON or Norm 
IGNITION switches ON — especially in inclement weather
Anti Skid ON
Speed brake retracted
Wait for stab misc to go off (up to 20 secs… See topic below)
Pitot & Static switch on
Read more about this Annunciator warning.

STAB MISCOMPARE:
In addition to Flaps, the entire C-560XL Elevator is also rotated when flaps are set to First notch.
This begins to set the required stabilizer angle by moving the Elevator’s leading edge downward to provide more lift for the nose.
You can see this happening outside.
Look at the place where the Elevator LE meets the fuselage.
Notice the small black line indicators on the fuselage which displays the range of the Elevator setting for Flaps1. This movement takes almost 30 seconds to slowly jack-screw into place.
In the cockpit you may hear the flaps move to the first notch, and stop (in about 8 seconds) but since the stabilizer is still moving, and is out of alignment for the flap setting, you will see that STAB MISC annunciator light stay on until it sets. Meanwhile the Master Caution light will blink, and it can be pressed to turn to solid (signifying that action is noted and being monitored). And then the MC and the STAB MISC annunciator will turn off once the STAB is all aligned.
The jet must NEVER be flown >200 kts with flaps >0
Even if you do retract flaps, continue to fly <200 kts UNTIL the Stab Misc annunciator is out, signifying that the flying stab has returned to neutral — and this can take up to 30 seconds!!
Read more about this Annunciator warning.

Get back to the INDEX


4 Handles beneath the Pilot-side Dashboard:
All work authentically and as labeled.
Pulling the PARKING BRAKE OUT locks brakes on all wheels to the maximum.
Pulling the CONTROL LOCK OUT (also sometimes referred to as a “gust lock” by pilots — especially in the GA aircraft category) locks all Control surfaces. You do not want to be flying with this on/OUT. Turning it “off” (pushed IN) is a critical part of the Preflight Checklists especially when starting from COLD AND DARK. Always start with the Preflight checklist, NOT from the starting tab.
The EMERGENCY BRAKE is self explanatory.
The AUX GEAR CONTROL is pulled only in the event of a total HYDRAULIC failure, and only at the last minute to “blow” the gear open and locked down just prior to landing. In the event of HYD failure, and once used/pulled, the gear can not be retracted. (see also the topic: See related topic:HYDRAULIC SYSYEM (PUMP FAILURES, CAUSES, EFFECTS, PROCEDURES)

YOKE: High Definition, fully functional, animated, and VR ready
High Definition Yoke, glass encased center medallion, and highly textured/grunge wear and tear.
IN XP12 — the yoke handles are straight edged.
Yokes can not be Shown/Hidden individually. 
To Show a hidden Yoke, click the large rectangle region under the Pilot and Copilot side PFDs. 
To Hide a Yoke, click either of these 2 areas:
         1) The blank region just under the Pilot and Copilot side PFDs   OR
         2) The SQUARE at the top of either of the Yoke main body (This later hot-spot moves with Yoke animations)
Using the Yoke with a joystick, mouse or in VR:
The yokes are enveloped within a manipulator that enables you to grab and move them for pitch and roll. 
However, X-Plane does not like 2 peripherals tussling over the same dataRef. This becomes significant if the Yoke is mapped to a Joystick and then an attempt is made to move it using a mouse or VR handle.
If this is attempted, and depending on the position of the stick — the Yoke will flutter around a LOT as it tries to resolve conflicting Joystick and Mouse and/or VR-handle commands.
TO SOLVE: You must choose how you want to use the Yoke most times in 3d… joystick, or Mouse/VR.
For joysticks, map your axes to the pitch/Roll and yaw options in the Sims keyboard menu
If using a mouse or VR, disable/remove the Roll, Pitch and Yaw mappings from the Joystick, and only use the mouse or VR handles to grab and manipulate the yoke body.

YOKE BUTTONS:
RED button disconnects the AP.  If any of the AP function buttons were active, they will still be lighted, but not active. 
TRIM  — this will also disconnect the AP. The buttons can be clicked for small up/down trim adjustments, or held for continuous trim.  NOTE: If the red AP is held down, TRIM becomes inactive.
TCS (Touch Control Steering). This custom real-world function allows a pilot to temporarily disconnect the AP and fly manually while the button is depressed. It is used to manually fly small, temporary course changes outside the AP control. Pilots must Press AND HOLD the button to temporarily disconnect the AP to fly corrective course and altitude changes (useful when avoiding TCAS warnings or ATC change requests).
Releasing the button returns control to the AP, which will immediately attempt to fly BACK to the flight parameters set by its functions and buttons.
TCS NOTE: 
If the jet is flown manually using TCS to an Altitude that causes the ALT BUG to be positioned beyond the constraints of the PFD’s altitude window (and not be seen) when released, the Jet is designed to “get back to altitude” as quickly as possible and may, depending on how great the variance is, get very aggressive with the climb or descent back to the ALT setting engaged to the AP. This WILL result in aggressive pitch. This is by design.

You have 2 options to use to control aggressive get-back-to-altitude that’s caused when your current altitude flown while on TCS results in the ALT bug disappearing from the PFD Altitude tape window: (greater or less than 300ft of where the AP Alt Bug is)
         1) Continue to manually fly the jet using TCS to within 300 ft of the ALT bug. Release TCS, and the jet will fly to the bug in a relatively calm manner.
         2) With TCS on, engage VS. Then release TCS. The jet will continue to fly level (because the VVI caret will be at 0).  Then, dial in Pitch desired, the AP will fly to the ALT bug using the VVI dial input, and VS will engage/change to ALT as it the ALT bug nears current altitude.

AP turns initiated after TCS to any heading bugs already dialed in will be obey the TURN dial constraint setting.

Get back to the INDEX


AOA — ANGLE OF ATTACK INDEXER “Dot” Cues in Augmented AP Mode:
AOA (test mode) Wet Compass (lighted), pilot position alignment Sight balls on the downtube. Functioning Icing lights and High-Def Dashboard Texturing/grunge

AOA becomes very critical during the final approach and Landing phases. You will see the AOA Indexer — the small box with 3 little windows found above and left of the wet compass on the front downtube — come alive when the gear are extended.

Use it, and the AOA ROUND DIAL (found left of the pilot-side Clock) to determine correct angles of attack for safe jet operations.
Never fly at angles that cause the AOA ROUND DIAL Needles to be in the RED — you are in danger of stalling!

In REALISTIC Panel mode, the AOA INDEXER instrument functions as do most AOA instruments:
1) If the AOA for the flap setting the Jet is configured to is too High (the nose is pointed too high for the given airspeed and flap setting, then the top chevron will light up (Red) — to resolve, increase speed (while maintaining the current AOA) or BETTER, push the nose down (then add power).
If the AOA is correct for the given airspeed and flap setting, the middle green chevron will light, and, if the AOA is too Low, the bottom yellow will light — reduce speed or pull the nose higher.

If in AUGMENTED panel mode, in addition to the indications found in the realistic mode (above) now each AOA INDEXER window displays an added AOA cue to use to help you achieve correct AOA — a Dot.
Dots show speed guidance, while the aforementioned chevrons display attitude cues. Displays in the top window tells the pilot to slow down (Dot) or lower/nose-down (Chevron), and the opposite it true for the lowest window. You want both dot and chevron (green) to be displaying in the middle window, showing that the aircraft is at the right attitude and speed, for the correct resulting AOA, for the current Flap setting.
When the AOA angle is correct BUT the speed is not optimal for that flap setting, then you will see ONLY the green chevron, (And the DOT will be in the either Yellow = speed too slow, or Red = speed too high windows of the gauge).
When AOA and the Speed are BOTH correct, then you will see a green chevron and a green dot both in the center window.
There can be a combination of chevrons and dots to help you know whether to change AOA or speed to get to an all green, perfect, approach-speed state (green chevron and dot) for each flap setting.  
Yes, its sensitive, and yes the “perfect range” is narrow by design like the real jet. 

TURN DIAL, AP LOW-BANK LIMIT ANNUNCIATOR and “BANK ANGLE” aural warnings

The TURN dial (in REALISTIC mode its found on the Center Console/Pedestal, in AUGMENTED MODE found on the upfront panel – shown in pics below) MUST be positioned at the 3 mark (straight up) for the AP to Engage — assuming the jet is at a safe flying airspeed (not in eminent danger of stalling) AND in the Air.

Once the AP is engaged, aircraft pitch will be maintained, while any roll will be cancelled for level flight.
You will see also a Green AP ENG annunciator in the PFD Annunciator panel
You may then limit the angle/rate of bank the AP will use by setting the TURN dial — 0 to 6 max.

The jet however has REALISTIC Rate-of-Turn, Bank Angle behavior, and warning callouts.
Notice that the images below also show muted reflections on the glass instrument covers found on all instruments on the front panel.

If you are flying < 9,999 ALT you can manually fly, or AP-dial, any TURN rate with “no bank angle” warning, AND there will be no green bank-angle limiter arc displayed at the top of the PFD’s artificial horizon.
Notice in this image:
1) AP ENG
2) AP flying a Max/high (6) bank angle set on the TURN dial
3) LOW Bank constraint function is off on the AP panel
4) Aircraft banking hard to fly to intercept HGD 241
5) Augmented Mode’s Auto Throttle is Engaged (Speed set 200kts). AT Button red if off.
6) AP’s ALT capture function is engaged to maintain 9850 Altitude during the turn

If you are flying > 10,000ft you may still dial or manually fly any rate of turn however:

…you will hear a Bank Angle warningsif your turn exceeds the green bank angle arc.(if Turn Rate set > 3)

Above 10,000 ft ALT, the PDF automatically displays a Green Bank angle limitation annunciator.
You should not bank beyond the arc. If you do, you will hear the “Bank Angle” warning for each time it is crossed. This is a safety feature of the real jet.

Real pilots set Bank angles toLOWon the AP Panel when above 10K ALT. And yes, that also means that if ATC asks you to “turn faster” above 10K your response should be: “unable; exceeds our design limit”.

There are times when the aircraft MAY exceed the arc on its own if you are only using 3 TURN (and not LOW). This is not a bug, and may be caused by how many degrees the turn needs, your current Airspeed, altitude, and gusts — all factors play a role. But it should be a temporary thing with the AP drawing the Bank angle back to within the green arc.

The recommended real-world TURN procedure is to always maintain a safe bank angle by piloting the jet to not exceed the green arc if flying manually, or, if on AP, by activating the LOWbank function button.

In this image, notice:
         1) AP ENG ; HDG and ALT functions being used by the AP
         2) Max/high (6) bank angle is dialed HOWEVER…
         3) LOW bank function is activated to constrain the aircraft to within green arc = no Bank angle aural warning.

Bank turn Limits have NAV turn consequences, so plan your routes to NOT require high degrees of turn rates above 10K ALT. (Or you will overshoot your Nav track, and the AP will then need to zig-zag back to track-back on course)

Get back to the INDEX


ENGINE, THROTTLES, AUTO THROTTLE, REVERSERS AND REVERSER STOW
PW545A/B Cross section
The center console: L to R: Trim Wheel, Speed Brake Switch, Throttles, Flap handle, 10 station fully functional Rotary test, Regular and Flight-Profile/TCAS integrated Custom Pulse L-Lights. partially Hidden Engine Sync Dial.
1 and 2 are the areas used to shut down (or start) engines.
Watch the manipulator arrows change when moving around each click spot to know whether the throttle will move forwards (feed fuel) or backwards (shut down.)
Highly recommended you turn Viewing click spots ON when starting out flying this jet.
Custom EFIS and MFD control Panel: 2 Wings options (PFD display) Auto Throttle Panel — Only available in AUGMENTED panel mode
N1 Target setting, Spring-loaded dial above the emergency standby RMU
Throttle Indent indicator above Pilot side Clock
Custom Glass Engine instrument
Thrust reverser Panel: Stow switches, 3-stage Reverser-Deploy Lights, Engine Fire Annunciator and Extinguisher Annunciator/Button. Cabin Mic (with Blue Ring)

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
PW545A (XL):
• Maximum dry weight—830 lbs. (376.5 kg)
• Takeoff rated thrust—3,804 lbs., sea level to 83°F (28°C)—test cell rating
• Maximum continuous rated thrust— 3,767 lbs., sea level to 83°F (20°C)— uninstalled rating
• Bypass ratio—4.0:1
• Oil quantity (system)—6.13 qts (5.8L)
• Oil quantity (tank)—2.44 qts (2.3L)

In the Sim, its best to turn View: Show Instrument Click Regions ON to more easily get acquainted with the numerous click spots around the throttles.
Throttles are commanded by using the 2 large throttle handles found in the middle of the seats on the Center Console/Pedestal.

ENGINE START AND SHUT DOWN
(read this section also for more detailed STARTER setup requirements and other relevant content)
To start engines, refer to the checklists built into the MFD.
The primary method to Start Engines is to use the Small Starter Buttons found on the left lower side of the Starter panel.
To Cut fuel off to the engines (individually), click each hot-spot area for the throttle being shut down found aft of the large Throttle handle which are labeled LH and RH on the Console (1, 2 in image Left) The throttle will move upward and backward to the CUT OFF ident, and the engine will spool down.
To introduce fuel from a Throttle in the cut off position, click that portion of the same manipulator that causes its hint to be a forward-pointing arrow.

Warning:
1) Begin with the PREFLIGHT Checklist, do not jump to the STARTING checklist as there are some steps in the preflight prior to being able to engines starting that need to be correct before the Start buttons will work.
2) The engine being started MUST be in the FUEL CUTOFF (see this image for more) position, or the start buttons will not work — see the images left for the 2 spots to click to get them to that position.
3) The switches in the start panel must also be set correctly — refer to the Checklists.
4) If you start and fail for some reason and the engine is still spilling you need to wait until N1<10; XP12:<4) to be able to restart and prevent a hot-start.
5) Turning both Engine GEN switches off, triggers a flashing Master Warning. You may cancel the MW light switch with a push to it, then, once the engines have completely spooled down, the MW will turn off. XP12: MW stays Lighted.
To initiate TOGA, click the button on the Port-side throttle handle. It must be clicked again to pull it out back again.
In 3d space, each throttle handle may be moved individually and independently forwards and back by grabbing the desired large throttle handle for asymmetric thrust, or, both throttles may be moved together by grabbing and moving the click spot found in the center of the two throttle handles.
SETTING THE AUTO THROTTLE (AT)
There is no Auto Throttle in the real C-560XL.
As a pilot once quipped when asked if the jet had an Auto throttle: “my CP is my AT!” — get it? .. the person in the right seat is the AT?!!

However, the Airsim3D C-560XL does provide you with a custom AT for simulator-only flying convenience, but to maintain immersion authenticity, it is ONLY available in the jets Augmented Dashboard mode (See also 2 Augmented AP instrument cluster POSITION modes section). 
Assuming engines running normally, to set the Auto Throttle, the AP must be first engaged.
To disengage the AT, the AP must still be on.

******************************************************************
AUTO THROTTLE (AT) IN XP12:
AT is visible and available only when using the AUGMENTED mode Panel in both XP11 and XP12 versions.

Engaging/Disengaging the AT can be done without the AP being on or off.
The AT can be used on the ground, but it is NOT recommended!!! If done, expect unusual throttle handle movements as the AT slams the throttles forward to overcome the large Current-Targeted speed difference while the FADEC struggles in the opposite way to pull them back, and since all engines are not created identical and have differing internal parts, they WILL behave erratically — this is NOT a bug, it is designed behavior resulting from AT misuse and misuse/failure behavior built into the engine model!!

CAUSE OF THROTTLE HANDLE NOT MOVING IN SYNC:
99% of the time, this may occur when the AT has shoved the throttles forward aggressively to overcome a high current-targeted speed change command by the Pilot.
Again, this is NOT a bug, it is designed behavior resulting from AT misuse and misuse/failure behavior built into the engine model!!

SOLUTION/To RESOLVE Out Of Sync Throttle handles:
If you find the Throttle handles are out of sync at any time do this procedure:
         1) Disengage the AT
         2) Click the center of the two Throttle handles to sync them; Grab the center and manually move the throttles a bit to make sure they are in sync once again
         3) Important, and especially if you are above transition altitude, set the N1 bug to 100% N1 on the N1 instrument.
         4) Reengage the AT, the speed window should sync to the current speed.
         5) Dial SMALL speed increases (or decreases) into the AT. Realistically this should be NO MORE than 3-5 kts/second acceleration/deceleration.

         Again remember, the real jet DOES NOT have an AT. It is provided in our C-560XL model in the simulator in the Augmented mode only for pilot convenience. But even though its totally unrealistic, we have realistically modeled the AT to follow the “be gentle” requirement of the real jet, so therefore, use small AT Accelerations/Decelerations only.

         At NO time must you allow the N1 to start to spike! This is not the equivalent of flying an airliner where large speed variance targets are dialed in to “set and forget it” while the hunkering airliner slowly speeds up to that target while overcoming its huge weight inertia.

         The C560 on the other hand is light and fast and has a 5:1 power to weight ration advantage over of something like an A380, so do not expect or assume to fly it like you would any other airliner. So UNLIKE what you may be used to doing in heavy airliners with lots of inertia, massive/rapid power changes in the C-560XL are for emergencies only, and are likely to conflict with the FADEC as it struggles to save the engines from abuse, So…Redline ITT is fun to watch (especially at night) but bad for the engines. Back off the throttle-slamming hoss!!

         The C-560XL’s airframe design REQUIRES small and deliberate g-load changes.

         6) Do this instead: Dial AT commanded speed increments up and down in smooth, small-increment to obey airframe g-load requirements to both not stress the airframe or redline the engines, and to also not cause unrealistic acceleration/decelerations for your passengers. Be measured. Be smooth, Be gentle.
         7) Once you have crossed transition alt, increase the N1 Bug’s FADEC restriction from the earlier setting at TO (80-90%) position up closer to the 100% position (using the N1 target setting dial just right of the Fuel Quantity gauges). Doing this will allow the engines to operate at higher RPM’s and since its cooler temps at Alt, you won’t redline the engines as much as would happen at lower altitudes.
******************************************************************

BE AWARE:
In XP11, the engines will set to full forward throttle if the AT is turned on without the AP first being on.
If this happens the throttle will be inoperable as the jet has taken over their operation.
TO SOLVE: Simply disengage the AT, or Engage the AP for the AT to throttle back to the power needed to fly its speed.
Steps to Set the AT:
         1) Set the desired speed (blue bug in Speed tape) by turning the dial that’s within the AUTO THROTTLE heading of the Augmented mode Panel . Press it to change Speed readings from S = KTs SPEED to M = .Mach

SETTING THE SPEED BUG in the G1000
IN XP12: Given the latest must-use AP rule changes LR now has in place in XP12 to make the G1000 work well (which we can not follow because that breaks our custom AP), it’s now become even more important to forget about using the G1000 for everything except for loading flight plans, and to always use the jet’s custom AP. More about this change, in the G1000 section.

Back to both XP versions…If using the Realistic Mode Panel the ability to set the Speed Bug in the traditional sense like when its used by the Auto Throttle, obviously goes away, because there is no AUTO THROTTLE in the real jet. In the C-560XL model, in realistic mode therefore, there is no Auto throttle.
In this case the speed bug in the PFD now becomes irrelevant for AUTO THROTTLE jet functionality.
It can however be used as a “reference” speed marker.
How? In XP11: By using the G1000’s FLC button… but there is a catch: Since the G1000 is set up to match the jet’s it-has-no-auto throttle-General-Aviation-classification model (which this jet belongs to) clicking the G1000’s FLC causes the blue speed bug in the PFD and g1000 to snap to the CURRENT SPEED.
You then have 2 choices:
         a) use the FLC (without AT) in the G1000 in XP11 — its as-is, we made no code changes, so please refer to LR’s document.
         b) while in FLC mode, use the Nose up and down arrows on the G1000 to change the speed bug, then turn FLC off (which disappears the G1000 speed bug) — but you have now changed the PFD’s speed bug as a speed reference — and then you can use the throttle manually to manage your airspeed.
Please refer to its online manual published by LR for any further G1000 instructions.

         2) If using the Augmented mode Panel in either XP11 or XP12, the Speed bug in the Jets PFD is used by the AT. Set it by turning the AUTO THROTTLE section dial on the Custom MFD Panel. This dial can also be pressed to change the readout from KTS (S) to MACH (M)

Click the AT button in the Custom MFD Panel to engage the throttles to the speed set. By design, and depending on the difference between current and desired Speed, the throttle will get-to-speed by using the as much or as little necessary power to accomplish that. WE STRONGLY RECOMMEND that you can control acceleration or deceleration rates by providing SMALL AUTO THROTTLS DIAL turns for smaller speed changes, more often.
         3) While the AT is functioning, you have the option to change the Speed set and the throttle will accelerate or decelerate the jet accordingly. Manually managing the rate of AT acceleration or deceleration are not options available in the real C-560XL. Pilots call their AT a CP. Get it?.
         4) To disengage the AT unclick AT button FIRST, then Disengage AP (if needed). (Also see the AUTO THROTTLE IN XP12:section above)
In XP11: You can disengage the AP first and the AT will disengage, but the AT light will still be lit by design. Turn the AP on to turn AT off, then AP off again if needed.
IN XP12: The AT runs independent of the AP.

ENGINE INSTRUMENTS:
Prominently displayed under the large annunciator panel are 2 custom Engine Instrument glass gauges.
Generally speaking seeing RED in that panel is not a good thing and needs immediate attention — especially high ITT. — reduce power.
High power settings should be used sparingly — and slamming the throttles forward (and seeing red temp spikes), while often seen in big heavy airliners, or in the movies for TO is NOT the authentic way to fly the C-560XL.
Instead look at The Throttle Indent Indicator: Its the small square instrument just above the Chronometer — its Lights indicate where the throttles are positioned on the console, instead of having to look down. Its has 3 sets of lights labeled TO, CLB and CRU — for each engine. 
Notice its lights climb as you advance the throttles to those detents on the throttle quadrant, each bulb lighting as each detent is reached. Avoid advancing the throttle further when the little TO light is green, that’s the TO detent. If you get overzealous with power its TO lights will also turn red, and the ITT stripes will also glow red, to warn you of your unnecessary use of high Engine power.

The real jet is limited to using TO power to max 5 min to avoid engine damage.

IN XP12: You may find that ITT temps may stay RED even after the N1 is brought below its 100 redline. This is normal, and this is because the engine needs time to get enough airflow to cool the engine down. Also Temps at your current alt are modeled into the engines so the Airspeed and Ambient temp variables will affect how long the engines take to get out of Red-line ITT temps. Bottom line, you should never fly the jet in any redline state, except in emergency situations! (but its very cool to see all these colors glow during night-ops on the dashboard!!)

The Jet has ample power and 90% N1 (up to 80-85% even) is normal TO power and extends Engine life. Set the N1 reminder bugs with the N1Target setting instrument to the right of the Right-side Engine display. (Part of the checklists)
Notable also is that the Main Engines glass instrument lacks ITT “numbers” below the ITT section of the gauge. This is not a bug or a willful omission, but the real jets’ display displays no such numbers.
Another fact to keep in mind is that LR’s ITT DataRefs and the jets custom ITT DataRefs might not be the same — this too is not a bug, but a result of custom Engine modeling to match the real-world throttling/temp curves.

And finally, real C-560XL pilots talk about the “all-right ruler” — when all is well and at cruise, generally all 4 (N1, ITT, Pressure, and Oil temp) lines align in an almost straight line across the gauges…its a good way to know that the engines are humming along nicely.
ENGINE FIRE: 
This is just one example of any number of the 42 annunciators or other warning lights throughout the aircraft to announce an aircraft condition that needs your immediate attention.
In case of an Engine fire:
The L or R ENGINE FIRE Annunciator will light up.
Several other Annunciators will also light indicating related system failures.
This is a serious flight risk and needs your immediate attention.
To Extinguish and shut down the engine that is on Fire:
First Fly the jet. Manually correct any asymmetric directional ground or flight control or bank issues caused by the failing engine.
As quickly as possible, move the affected engines’ throttle to idle.
Again, manually correct any large asymmetric directional control caused by the failing engine.
Above all, stabilize the aircraft FIRST.

Flip the glass cover over lighted ENG FIRE button open, press the button
The BOTTLE ARMED PUSH button lights up to show that side’s Fire retardant is now available.
Pressing the BOTTLE ARMED PUSH will discharge and extinguish fire. 
This button can only be used once per engine, per flight.
Verify ENG FIRE button is no longer lighted. You will see other annunciators in the Upfront panel.
Move affected Throttle to FUEL CUTOFF position
Flip Thrust reverser Switch to STOW EMER position to lock that sides damaged engines’ Reverser mechanism.
Turn the Cut Off Engines GEN to OFF.
Cancel Master Warning and Caution buttons
Turn IGNITION to NORM
Turn EEC switch to MAN
Turn FUEL BOOST to OFF if ON or NORM
Turn EMER LIGHTS switch ON
Turn PASS SAFETY switch PASS SAFETY ON — this will configure the cabin for emergency egress lighting, including over wing lighting on the Starboard side.
Call in the emergency to ATC
Follow Checklists for descent and landing!

Land as soon as possible.
Evacuate the passengers by opening the MAIN door.

Landing on one engine is tricky… advice:
* Land on flaps 1 — speed will be higher, but that gives added directional/pitch control
* Expect N1 on the working engine to be higher, watch the ITT – try to stay out of Red!
* Use smaller pitch and bank inputs as you approach
* Make as long of an approach as possible to allow getting good RWY directional control, and sink rates
* Try to make small throttle movements in air, or suffer high yaw induced by asymmetric thrust
* on the ground, use gentle assymetric braking to stay on the runway — no one is going to fault you if you do not stay on the center line!

Get back to the INDEX


REVERSER DEPLOY OPERATIONS:
As fashionable as it might be in airliners to quickly deploy engine reversers on touch down, and then slam the throttles into a roaring reverse, in this jet, as we have said repeatedly, please change assumptions and unlearn such “airline or other aircraft-flying” behaviors. As far as landing and reversers in the C-560XL are concerned, the operational word here is: relax. Take it easy.
The jet lands at low speeds, has low inertia, and good brakes. So don’t go slamming things around!

Reversers can not be deployed while airborne, and can only be deployed when there is full weight of the aircraft on BOTH main gear.

On landing, and once the main gear are down, push the Yoke slightly forward to keep the nose from bouncing off the runway, deploy Speed brakes (if you like, though they are not necessary), THEN deploy Reversers.  

When you initiate reversers, watch the 3 THRUST REVERSER lights on top of the main upfront panel on each side, for each engine.

There is a 3 second delay (like the real jet) between the first two, and final DEPLOY (white light) while the reverse mechanism is working to open the buckets.  

Once you see the WHITE DEPLOY annunciations, and if >60Kts, and only if on BOTH sides are lighted (see asymmetric deployment caution notes below), only then throttle up to initiate reverse thrust. And then throttle back once ~ 65Kts.

Reverser buckets may be kept deployed <60kts, but ONLY with engines idling to further act as “sails” to increase drag to aid in slowing down and stopping. 

Reversers may be used asymmetrically to aid for icy taxi-conditions, but be very careful not to overdo this.

Reversing the jet using Reverse bucket deployed and power is not authorized.

STOW or DEPLOY ENGINE REVERSERS:
REVERSER STOW (Switch): Each engines’ reverser may be stowed separately. This causes the Reverser on the stowed side to become inoperable . Stowing is performed by using the switch labeled NORM/STOW EMER found in the upfront panel on the left and right sides for Port (L) and Starboard (R) THRUST REVERSER panel, and by placing the switch on the desired side to be stowed, to the the STOW EMER position.
Except for the switch’s UP position, Stowing produces no annunciation. The engine continues to behave normally for normal throttle up and back conditions.
If a Reverser is in its STOW state, its Reverser paddle click zone to DEPLOY it will be unavailable. 

REVERSER OPERATIONS CLICK SPOTS
Please turn on Show Instrument Click Regions when looking at the numerous click spots around the throttles for the first time and keep them on until familiar with the locations and operation of each of the several click hot spots that work together to create an authentic C-560XL throttle reverser operation.
Using a Joystick to DEPLOY and operate Thrust Reverser and sim KEYBOARD MAPPING 
It is STRONGLY RECOMMENDED that you first map the thrust reverser function to either the TOGGLE THRUST REVERSERS option in the sim’s Keyboard mapping function.
And ONLY IF you need to control Reversers asymmetrically, then instead map keys to HOLD THRUST REVERSER AT MAX#1 and #2  and/OR TOGGLE THRUST REVERSER #1 and #2 to desired keys.

Using the TOGGLE THRUST REVERSERS mapping option will allow the sim to use the Joystick throttle slider to advance throttles symmetrically once the Reverser Toggle button deploys the reversers (with the 3-second deploy process noted above)

Using the HOLD THRUST REVERSER AT MAX#1 and #2  and/OR TOGGLE THRUST REVERSER #1 and #2 instead will give you power to perform asymmetric (more realistic) Reverser operations, as you will be able to deploy each Bucket individually for asymmetric reverser power application. Asymmetric Reverser power is used by real C-560XL pilots during especially challenging real-life Icy landing and aqua-plaining conditions.
BE AWARE: If using the #1,2 Mapped option, and you have as an example DEPLOYed the Port Engine Reverser, and the other engine — Starboard(R) — Reverser is running normally (not deployed),  then the application of power from the joystick’s throttle will cause the P engine to reverse while the S engine thrusts forward in an asymmetric manner.   This is by design.   In the example, if the rudder pedal is then pushed hard R, the jet will pivot smartly to R around the R gear. This is an extreme, edge case for very icy condition maneuvering and should be applied with extreme caution!! (See added CUTIONS below too)

Irrespective of what you have mapped, pilots always have the option to look down and interact with the reverser paddles attached to the throttles. Turn the sims view Click regions to on to view where those “hot spots are”. First click lifts the paddles up then they can be lifted for deploying reversing power. Be aware, that Reversers are not available in the air; weight must be on both rear wheels before they can be activated.

CAUTION: Asymmetric STOW or DEPLOY
1) If you DO NOT see the the white DEPLOY light on either engine deployment annunciation side (either due to a reverser malfunction of if one has been intentionally STOWED, DO NOT initiate reverse thrust — as doing so will cause one engine to reverse while the unlit one roars to full life causing a huge, and dangerous, amount of asymmetric thrust, and control of the aircraft is VERY likely.
In that case, the reverser has failed on the non-lights side, so use brakes only. The aircraft is fully capable of using the brakes to stop.
Flip the STOW switch on the failed side, and report that failure to the ground crew (make believe).
2) If you have mapped and are using the sim’s “throttle toggle” key to deploy/retract reversers, be aware:
a) If PORT Reverser is switched to STOW, and if Reversers are toggled on, the Starboard Reversers will deploy, Port reversers will not deploy (as designed). Toggling retract again will retract the Starboard side.
b) However, if STARBOARD Reversers is switched STOW, and a reverser command is toggled, the Port Reversers will deploy, and the Starboard reversers will not deploy (as designed). HOWEVER unlike a) above, toggling retract will NOT retract the Port reversers. This is not a bug, but a feature of the Sim’s Reverser default TOGGLE THRUST REVERSERS toggle command. It needs all Reversers to be working to toggle, and since the 1st in the series is not working (STOWED) it gets stuck. To Retract the Port reverser Deployment in this case, flip the PORT STOW SWITCH to up to the EMER STOW position. That will retract the Port reversers, but the deploy annunciations will still be on. Then flip the switch back down to the NORM position, and that will extinguish the DEPLOY annunciations.
3) It is not necessary to have throttles at idle when deploying Reversers, but that is a very good real-world piloting practice. therefore, ONLY AFTER the white DEPLOY light is alight should you put the engines into “reverse” with the throttles.
This Reverser sequence and throttle animation is another example of being modeled exactly to the real world experience. 

DEPLOY Thrust reverser using the click spots in 3D space (especially for VR) to:  
    1) DEPLOY reversers by clicking on each individual Reverser handle (these look like little paddles attached to the main throttle stem).
Watch the upfront DEPLOY annunciation: WAIT for the bucket/s to deploy, taking just under 2 seconds, and announced as Deployed with the White DEPLOY annunciators. 
    2) Once DEPLOY is white, the throttle/s will move back out of Idle and the throttle handles will tilt slightly backward, and individual big-throttle handle click spots will hide.
    3) Once in DEPLOY state, 2 added handle click zones are provided per Reverser throttle lever and the Paddle zone first clicked above, now changes function.
DEPLOY STATE operation:
         a) For asymmetric reverse thrust, click and HOLD the area directly over the lever paddle and pull backward (downward direction in 3D) to apply reversing power to the clicked side, and then forward (up) to reduce power.  
         b) For symmetric Reverser thrust from both engines, pull the click zone that spans both big throttle handles.  There is also a 2nd a small horizontally shaped “bar” behind the levers, for added convenience.
         c) To get back to normal Throttle operations, Click the zone ABOVE, and offset to the left or right for each side, of the lever paddles.
In all cases, when in DEPLOY and throttle power changed, the C-560XL’s Main Throttle handles do not move; only the Reverser handles are animated. They move first from Normal to Reverser DEPLOY positions, then if acted on further, also animate up and down tied to thrust power being managed during Reverser operations. 

Get back to the INDEX


STARTING ENGINES:
Starter Buttons; Critical switches for Start: Boost, Crossfeed, IGN, DC Power, GENS
1) Starting the jet with ENGINES running: (highly recommended for those starting out)
There are 3 scenarios:
         1) Load the jet with engines running as a first option when starting X-Plane. If loading the jet in this case, Engines and critical systems are all on. You will need to enter a flight plan and set the conditions for a safe takeoff (see Checklists). 
         2) Load the jet following a previous load of another aircraft. If loading the jet in this case, Engines and critical systems are all on. Pilot needs to enter a flight plan, set the conditions for a safe takeoff (see Checklists). 
         3) If the C-560XL jet is first loaded without engines running, then, without changing aircraft, the C-560XL is reloaded from X-Plane’s Flight Cong aircraft menus with the start with engines running option, then the jet will load with engines running, but you will need to turn the PFD, MFD and other systems on and possibly unlock controls where needed. Please use the Checklists to ensure all Jet settings and systems are set up for a safe flight in this scenario.

To cut fuel to running Engines … simply move throttle/s to the cutoff position — pull them all the way back by clicking each of the Hot spot manipulators to be found just aft and at the base of the 2 throttle handles — one for each engine. Follow the Checklists for a complete shut down to cold and dark.

About those small ENGINE START L, DISENGAGE, R buttons:
The Manipulators to click them are sized to the button dimensions.
We can not make them bigger or they will overlap.
We can but will not create popups and or Tablet-like appliances to be able to check boxes — that costs code (think FPS), and its NOT what real pilots do… they push those buttons.
Authenticity is our north star.

THAT SAID HOWEVER, there are things you can do to have a good start-button-push experience:
         1) Resist the temptation to zoom in to see the buttons to make them look bigger. Its not necessary given #2 solution below. But if you do, then click the TOP half of the button to activate it.
         2) You are probably pointing the ” hands’ finger” on the button, and pressing it, and getting frustrated that its not working. The assumption of using the pointed finger to do the work is natural just because of X-Plane’s icon design.

BUT, instead of using the finger part of the manipulator to push the button, instead try to “palm” the button by placing the entire palm of the hand icon on the button .. even if its finger-part is sticking out/off the button frame…then press/click it. This all may sound like a weird solution, but trust us it works, and if you must know, its partly due to the way LR designed the hand manipulator to work — its center does the work, not the finger, and since this is such a small button and click area, the click-center is the “palm”, not the finger, so you need to palm the button, not poke your finger at it :))
2) The COLD AND DARK START: 
(Performing this should ONLY be attempted when you have a good understanding of most jet systems and functions — its not hard, but you need to know what to click and observe in real time, and the order of steps to perform — Remember this is a 95% replicated jet!)

If you perform this step in X-Plane, and you see the following scenario, then this is NOT STARTING COLD AND DARK —> If you have the jet running, then go to the Sim’s Flight Configuration menu, and uncheck Start with engines running, and then reload the aircraft, then ALL THAT DOES, is start the aircraft with JUST the engines not running, and everything else will be NOT be cold and dark. This is NOT a bug. Read on.

2a) TO LOAD A “TRUE”, 100%, COLD AND DARK STATE:
There are a couple of things to be aware of when trying to get this jet to start in a TRUE COLD AND DARK SCENARIO/state:

         2a 1) If the sim has been started with the C-560XL running (with engines running), if you then simply go to the Sim’s Flight Configuration menu and uncheck the START ENGINES RUNNING box and reload the jet, you will not see a TRUE cold and dark start. If you do this, X-Plane will restart the jet with ONLY the Engines not running (as expected), BUT all the other CUSTOM conditions/systems and functions needed to set the jet up for a TRUE cold and dark start will not happen or be set.
This is not a bug, rather, the Sim has no understanding of all the custom things needed to reset all its systems to 0.
All X-Plane does in this scenario is to start the jet with “Engines not running” (As you asked it to).

         2a 2) In order to load a “TRUE”, 100%, cold and dark state, the Jet must be completely reloaded for all its scripts to kick in and reset ALL its custom/needed systems to be at 0 for a TRUE cold and dark state.
Therefore, if you wish to start in a TRUE cold and dark state (to be able to then follow everything that the Checklists walk you through as real pilots do) you have 2 choices:
                  a) If the sim is has the C-560XL loaded — engines running or not, then go to the Sim’s Flight Configuration menu, and load something like the default Beech Baron aircraft, with/without engines running no matter. Once the Baron’s cockpit is in view, then return to the Sim’s Flight Config menu, and then RELOAD the C-560XL but now UNCHECK the “Start with Engines Running” box. This will load the jet into a true Cold and Dark scenario.
                  b) If the sim is being started, or you have been flying another aircraft and wish to now switch to the C-560XL and begin with a True Cold and Dark scenario, simply click the C-560XL option’s CUSTOMIZE button when on the Aircraft config menu, and uncheck the “Start with Engines Running” box, load the jet, and it will load into a true C&D state.


2b) ONCE LOADED TRUE COLD AND DARK, TO GET STARTED:
Every real 560XL pilot starts and ends their day with this task:
Go to and open the External Battery compartment (found outside, Labeled Battery Disconnect, and Aft of the Port Wing root)
Click on the battery leads to connect the Jet to its Main battery.

One of the last tasks real pilots perform is, after shutting everything down int eh cockpit and cabin, locking the doors, is to return to this “first step” to decouple the main leads from the battery to disconnect everything, and close the Battery compartment.
NOTE: In XP11 You must be using the “Vulkan” option in the sim’s Display settings to view click areas in the Outside camera view.
If using the Opel GL Display settings in XP11 you will need to “drift” through the fuselage using an inside camera view to travel back and outside to view the Outside Battery compartment location.
(Requiring Vulkan to see hot-spots in outside camera view is an X-Plane 11 requirement)
IN XP12, Vulcan is on by default all the time (and not change-able) per the sim’s design.
2c) EXTERNAL/Outside Battery Compartment and Connecting the Main Battery:
Connecting and Disconnecting the battery leads in the outside battery compartment is the first and last task every real-life PIC of a C-560XL performs.
         1) Open the outside Battery Access panel, (found outside, Labeled Battery Disconnect, and Aft of the Port Wing root) and click the connector to connect/disconnect the main battery.
         2) Once connected, head back into the cockpit.
         3) Make sure the GEN switches and the Avionics switch found on the front dashboard DC POWER section of the ENGINE START panel, are in the OFF position.
         4) Turn the Battery switch to ON
         5) And then Avionics ON. You should now see a lighted dashboard but the MFD will still be off.
         6) Send power to the MFD (Center Console/Pedestal, MFD controller panel, Big dial marked with OFF, SG1,  NORM , SG2. Turn dial to Norm)
                  You will now have MFD power, and therefore access to the Checklists.
         7) Call them up by pressing the top left button on MFD instrument on the dashboard (NORM).  Click the MFD screen to view a pop out.
         8) Start with, and follow, the Preflight Checklists to get the jet functioning and ready to fly.
ALERT: Please DO NOT start checklists from the STARTING page when starting cold and dark … begin with PREFLIGHT and methodically run through the topics/pages in turn until you get to STARTING to ensure all systems are up and running to support actually being able to Start the engines.

Return to the Cold and Dark section.

Like the real jet, the start/disengage buttons are soft, so they show no animation by design.

Pressing the DISENGAGE button during a start will stop the starting process.
Wait until N1 is back down to 0 before trying to start once more.

ALERT: ENGINES MUST BE IN FUEL CUTOFF FOR START BUTTONS TO WORK
If you have special throttle hardware, DO NOT ASSUME that your hardware will move the sim throttles to their cutoff position when moved to the hardware’s cutoff position.
If the throttles are not in the Fuel cutoff position, the STARTER BUTTONS WILL NOT WORK.
Check to see that the throttles ARE in fact in the cutoff — they must be fully back in the slide slot, and raised higher than a throttle would normally be is in its non-cutoff, working position. The small black bracket found on the inside of the throttle stem should be viewed looking down on them directly. Notice in the imaged below, the R-side handle in the not cut off position shows the bracket over the IDLE position.

Warning FOR ALL ENGINE STARTING SCENARIOS:
1) Begin with the PREFLIGHT Checklists, do not jump to the STARTING Checklists as there are some steps in the preflight prior to being able to engines starting that need to be correct before the Start buttons will work.
2) The engine being started MUST be in the FUEL CUTOFF position, or the start buttons will not work — see the images here to locate the 2 spots to click to get the throttles to the cutoff position.
3) The switches in the start panel must also be set correctly for each side based on the throttle being started — refer to the Checklists.
4) Similarly, you will need the Right side Starter button to start the Right (Port) engine, and use the Left Starter button for the left (Starboard) engine. You can not start both engines with 1 button!
5) If you start and fail for some reason and the engine is still spilling you need to wait until N1<10; XP12:<4) to be able to restart and prevent a hot-start.
6) Turning both Engine GEN switches off, triggers a flashing Master Warning. You may cancel the MW light switch with a push to it, then, once the engines have completely spooled down, the MW will turn off. XP12: MW stays Lighted.

Get back to the INDEX


FUEL CROSSFEED SWITCH and FUEL X-FEED annunciator
Unlike Airliners, the C-560XL does not transfer fuel between its Port and Starboard Fuel tanks. Instead it has an X-Feed system that enables you to maintain fuel balance if/as needed by selecting which tank to draw fuel from.
Be Aware: The APU in the jet draws fuel from the Right/Starboard tank only. It has a burn rate that is not really noticeable if the engines are running. But if the engines are off and the APU is used over a period of time (to recharge the battery) there will be a noticeable L & R fuel weight fuel load differences.
In the real world this is common when waiting for passengers and using the Air Conditioning to keep the jet cool as an example. (see more in the separate CABIN/COCKPIT TEMPERATURE PANEL Section)

Generally, in these conditions (running APU on ground), the jet is started and the CROSSFEED selector kept centered.
Then with the engines on and the run up and taxi to the designated runway, the C-560XL will use the fuel in the L tank (larger quantity) until the weight imbalance is corrected.

Obviously, you always have the option to manually control which tank the engine/s are being supplied fuel FROM, and is done by selecting the side of the jet that fuel is to be drawn FROM.
As an example, turning the CROSSFEED selectors dial-top to the L hand tank will supply the engines (both if they are both running) with fuel from the L tank only — these can be observed by watching the FUEL QUANTITY numbers per side in the top Right Engine Instrument Panel. When turning the CROSSFEED to either R or L, and if the FUEL BOOST switches are not ON (UP) they will be turned on automatically — Fuel Boost is required for CROSSFEED operations.
Depending on whether an engine is running or not, and which side the selector is turned to, (and if not already done so) the Tank Selected FUEL BOOST switch will be automatically turned on.
As Examples:
         1) Both engines running, CROSSFEED set to Center = Fuel is draw from both L and R tanks equally (assuming equal  thrust), No auto Fuel Boost initiated
         2) Both engines running, CROSSFEED set to L tank = Fuel draw from L only (assuming same thrust), L Tank fuel boost on
         3) L running, R off, CROSSFEED set to R tank = Fuel draw from R tank only, R Tank fuel boost on
         4) L running, R off, CROSSFEED set to L tank = Fuel draw from L tank only, No auto boost
         5) Both engines off, APU running — CROSSFEED selector position is irrelevant, APU always draws fuel from the right tank

ALERT:
In XP11 the CROSSFEED switch will automatically switch to Center to use fuel from both tanks once the tank quantities are equal, to maintain a balanced aircraft.
In XP12 :
You must first turn the APU off before you can rebalance the aircraft. Real more in the APU PANEL section.
You must remember to manually recenter the CROSSFEED dial once you have achieved Fuel quantity indicated. If you follow the checklists, that will remind you to do that (while TAXIING).
And you will also the X-feed annunciator lighted in the upfront annunciator panel.

Get back to the INDEX


HYDRAULIC SYSYEM (PUMP FAILURES, CAUSES, EFFECTS, PROCEDURES) Available XP11 v1.5+ , XP12v 1.1+ 
The C-560XL is equipped with 2 Hydraulic (HYD) pumps, each of which are paired to, and driven by, each sides’ engines.
It stands to reason therefore that when an engine is not running, its HYD pump is not working.
BOTH PUMPS MUST HAVE FAILED for the 5 jet functions listed below to stop working.
One running pump, from either engine, will continue to run all hydraulic systems in the Jet, but, land the Jet as soon as, and as safely as, possible when you see a one-sided pump failure (especially when both engines are running normally).
The Hydraulic system runs the following 5 Jet functions:
         1) Gear
         2) Flaps
         3) Engine reversers
         4) Wheel Brakes
         5) Airspeed Brakes (they are not “spoilers” in the true sense of the lift-killing word, like found in other aircraft)
The causes of HYD Pump failures:
         1) Normal wear and tear
         2) Engine fires — deploying Engine Fire suppression for a affected engine takes that side HYD pump offline.
If you see this displayed in the upfront Annunciator panel, then you have a TOTAL HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE.
ON, AND STAYING ON: COMPLETE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES for each system:
         A) If the system failed with the gear down, then the gear will remain down and can not be retracted.
         B) If the system failed with the gear up, then the gear will up and can be “blown down” when needed. Once blown down, they can not be retracted.

HYDRAULIC INOPERATION EMERGENCY PROCEDURES:
1) GEAR BLOW DOWN
         * Declare an in-flight emergency to ATC.
         * Keep the Gear up until you are on close-final approach — you only get one shot at blowing down the gear with the emergency nitrogen bottle, so time it correctly. By design, Gear-down causes a lot of drag so expect the Aircraft to slow down appreciably
         * Reduce airspeed to under 200 kts by actively managing Pitch and Power. Speed brakes are not available (see #5 below).
         * When Ready (airport in sight, on GS, ASI < 200Kts) move gear handle down. Nothing will happen outwardly. Don’t panic!
         * Pull and turn AUX GEAR CONTROL handle clockwise — big Red T-Handle just to the left of the Anti Ice Switches. THIS will cause the N-Bottle to open valves to blow the gear down.
         * Real pilots may use the slipstream to fishtail the aircraft a bit to make sure the gear has locked. But DO NOT over do this.
         * Observe the gear handle panel for 3 green lights confirming the gear is down and locked in place
         * Land
2) FLAPS
         2a) If the system failed with the Flaps > 0 (down to any degree), then the Flaps will remain in that position (despite the handle moving). They can not be retracted.
                  * Declare an in-flight emergency to ATC.
                  * Observe Flaps-down airspeed restrictions.
                  * Land ASAP
         2b) If the system failed with the Flaps == 0 (all up), then the Flaps will remain Up (despite the handle moving). They can not be Extended.
                  * Land when possible while maintaining safe Airspeeds for 0 degree flaps (>135 kts for safe Angle of Attack — The AOA needle should not venture into Yellow — pitch down and power up as necessary to get back to safe AOA)
3)ENGINE REVERSER
         * Both Engine reversers will be inoperable.
         * Switch them to the STOW position (STOW Switches on either side of the Main Annunciator panel).
         * Land on RWYS of sufficient length to allow for braking to slow down the aircraft (which are also not as powerful as they are when operating on a limited emergency Nitrogen bottle!)
4) WHEEL BRAKES
         * Brakes are operable from the emergency Nitro supply, but the braking is not as effective.
         * Land on RWYS of sufficient length to allow for extra braking distance to slow down the aircraft (Remember, you also do not have reversers working either!)
         * Nose wheel steering is normal since it is cable operated from the Rudder pedals.
5)AIRSPEED BRAKES (ASB)
         a) If the system failed with the ASB in the retracted position, then the ASB will remain retracted and can not be extended up
         b) If the system failed with the ASB extended/up position, then the ASB will automatically de-energize and fall back to the retracted position (irrespective of ASB switch position), and can not be extended up.
Get back to the INDEX

Electrical System:
The C-560XL has 2 battery systems: An Emergency and Regular battery.
There are also various battery connect/disconnect switches/options, and charging options all authentically modeled.
Lighted, Authentically modeled Main Battery/Compartment
Shown disconnected. To Connect, click the main leads to set to the terminals + and – terminals for Bain Battery Power.
Landing/Taxi Lights Switch options and position
Safety Lights – Center Console/Pedestal. Notice the GREEL reflections on the White LIGHTS switches cast from the GREEN STDBY PWR Bulb.
SEE ALSO… NAV, TAIL RECOGNITION (Bottom row of switches), AND WING INSPECTION LIGHT SSWITCHES (top right)
Light Panel Details, set with Passenger Safety Switches in the cockpit. Notice light cast from individual bulbs for steps — authenticity!
Cabin and Step Lights ON — Panel AFT of middle step — NO LIT Textures ~300 individually tuned and directed lights everywhere.
Notice light reflections…. stronger lights (Like roof lights cast light further.
Outside:
External Main Battery: Access from outside in the Battery compartment positioned aft of the port wing root. Click the dial to connect or disconnect all power to the aircraft (including the Emergency battery)
Normal Battery Switch: Turn the Main battery on by setting the Switch under the label DC POWER on the Pilots side of the dashboard to up/BATT ON.
Emergency battery/switch: The Battery itself is not accessible, but when the main battery is connected, power can be can be set using the Switch under the label DC POWER on the Pilots side of the dashboard. In XP11, this setting only powers critical instruments: Standby Artificial Horizon, Standby VOR, Engine N1 panel (only) and small Standby Radio (Under the N1 setting box) are operable to conserve power for critical functions. Cabin, step, flight safety and emergency egress lighting will continue to function.  All nav, Wing inspection, Tail flood, and Land/Taxi lights function (assuming volts >20)
IN XP12: Switching to Emergency battery powers: Clocks (turn them on and set functions as needed), AOA gauge (but no has lighting), Comm panel (remember Comm1 must be on to hear ATC), Standby Horizon and HSI, Standby Radio unit, Gear position lights. Cabin, step, flight safety and emergency egress lighting will continue to function. All nav, Wing inspection, Tail flood, and Land/Taxi lights function (assuming volts >20)
Both XP11 and XP12:
TO SWITCH FROM NORM to EMERG battery power:
If the DC POWER BATT switch is ON (and engines running normally) L GEN & R GEN ON — this continues to charge the battery! without it the Batteries will loose power, then move BATT switch to EMER. EMER instruments cluster display and work only.
TO SWITCH FROM EMER to NORM battery power:
         1) First switch L GEN and R GEN switches OFF — very important to prevent surge to Batteries when changing sources.
         2) Then, Move BATT switch from EMER to ON (up), and then turn the L GEN and R Gen Switches back on to continue charging.

NOTE: If the Gen Switches are set to ON and then the Battery Switch is turned to EMER, then turned back to BATT ON (with the gens still online) the normal instruments WILL NOT LIGHT across the dashboard, and only continue to display EMERG instruments. This is by design to prevent overload to the regular battery.
To solve: Move the Batt switch back to OFF. Then move both gen switches to OFF. Turn the BATT switch back on/up to Normal, then bring the L gen and R GEN back online.
You will see a MASTER WARNING if the engines are running and BOTH gens are taken offline. This is by design to alert you to the Gen status.  Press the MW to cancel blink, and turn GENs on to extinguish it.

Battery Disconnect switch: On the Port (left) Pilot side panel — Flip the Red cover to access the switch. This will kill power with the battery connected.
Interior lights Disconnect switch: Found below the afore mentioned disconnect switch. Flip its red cover to access switch to turn off all power to the cabin.
Cockpit LIGHTS pane; with DAY/NIGHT Lighting mode switch. Labeled ON/OFF
Standby POWER being tested, and bulb casting green glow.
COCKPIT LIGHTING:
Individual Pilot and Copilot MAP lights that can be dimmed, and which can swiveled for custom aiming, are available on each side wall panel.
AUX PANEL dial on the pilot side panel controls dashboard under hood lights. 
PANEL LIGHT: this panel is located below the Pilot PFD and has several dials:
Flood controls 2 very bright overhead roof lights. They will also Automatically turn on full bright if the PASS
SAFETY Switch (Center Console/Pedestal) is set to SEAT BELT, and the EMERG LTS (front dash below Main Battery switch) is set to ON.
To turn off, move switches out of the Emergency positions and turn Flood dial back down.  Flood light aim is fixed.
Day/Night Lighting mode Switch (simply labeled ON – OFF on the LIGHT PANEL)
This is NOT a turn-the-lights on/off switch, but rather a great feature in the jets cockpit design.

When the switch is OFF, it turns NIGHT MODE LIGHTING OFF This makes all instruments bright, and visible in the day. When turned ON, the Lights are MUTED for Night flying. When OFF the UNDERHOOD light is off, and all panel and instruments are set to full bright for DAYLIGHT flying… everything needs to be bright to compete with the ambient light. In this mode, except for the Flood light, the other dials to rotate, but have no function.

When the Day/Night Lighting mode Switch is ON, it turns NIGHT MODE LIGHTING ON — the UNDERHOOD light is turned on, the dash and Center Console/Pedestal instruments all dim to make flying during the night more comfortable. All the dimmer dials now work. Flipping the switch Off and then On again “resets” the mode to default night mode setting.

Its easier to think of this switch as a “DAY panel, NIGHT Panel” brightness switch. (the actual labels used on the panel are authentic — a mark for keeping it “real”)

Take a moment to look around the cockpit and cabin at night — Its a matter of pride that ALL the lighting you see is from real bulbs, about 300 of them, all real beams, individually tuned and aimed. There are no flat 2D lit textures. because we use real lights, their glows change with ambient and view direction. That’s the small glows reflecting off colored lighting against the bezels. Notice the light change when throttles or the chairs are moved etc…. try it for full effect.  Don’t blame us if you fly more at night now!

The HDG REV, ATT REV, ADC REV, the AHRS1 switches, and on the CP side — CKPT RECIRC, WEMAC BOOST AHRS2 and buttons on the COCKPIT VOICE RECORDED animate, but do no work.
Other PANEL LIGHT dials: With the exception of FLOOD, all dials only work if the Day/Night switch (see above) is OFF
         FLOOD – controls the overhead, fixed, flood lights.
         LEFT — dim/brighten instruments on the pilot side
         CENTER — dim/brighten center-dashboard and console/pedestal instruments
         RIGHT — dim/brighten instruments on the Co-pilot side + APU display if on
         EL — dim/brighten Electroluminescence label and striping across the entire cockpit
A quick way to “reset” the dim if needed is to flip the Day/night switch of and then back on (but the dials stay as they were)

Other COCKPIT LIGHT dials:
There is a MAP LIGHT dial on both the Pilot and Copilot sidewalls that control the overhead map lights on each side individually and independently. Each overhead fixture can be moved to direct its individual light beam.
On the Pilots side is an AUX PANEL LIGHT dial, (weirdly named by Cessna) that controls the brightness of the under-hood dashboard lighting.
LANDING, NAV, TAIL FLOOD (recognition) and WING INSPECTION LIGHTs:
HDR lighting must be ON in X-Plane Graphics setting to see full effect of AirSim3D’s exclusive THXp Lighting!
LANDING LIGHT SWITCHES: Found Aft of the Throttle quadrant.
PULSE LT — custom flashing Landing Lights:

These are high intensity landing lights that pulse (L and R alternating) and automatically switch from Pulse to Steady (for Landing and TO) based on the current flight configuration/profile/altitude/Air collision warning states.
PULSE LT TCAS: In this position, the Landing Lights continuously pulse ignoring all other profile conditions
LANDING/TAXI:
In the ON position, each side will shine high intensity Landing lights
In the REC/TAXI position, these turn on separate, Taxi intensity lights for airport operations 
NAV, STROBES, TAIL RECOGNITION, WING INSPECTION LIGHTS:
Turn on NAV, TAIL FLOOD, WING INSP switches as needed.
ANTI-COL GND/REC turns the Tail BEACON and STROBES on; while GRND REC ON turns the BEACON on only.
PASS SAFETY turns Cabin EXIT/SEATBELT signs on
PASS SAFETY + EMER LIGHTS (dash, lower left) ON configures the cabin for emergency egress + turns Starboard side Wing-Walk lights ON (Shark lights)
Turning the PASS SAFETY switch to SEAT BELT with EMER LIGHTS ON will turn FLOOD LIGHTS on to max. To dim/turn FLOODS off, move SEAT BELT to OFF or PASS SAFETY ON , then turn the FLOOD dial low. If that dial is in its max low position, the lights will dim, but the dial will not move.
TAIL FLOOD: These splash Light onto Both Sides of the tail with lights positioned on the top surface of the Vertical Stabilizers.
WING INSP: These light up the top surface of both wings from lights situated mid-way on the fuselage.
When viewing these lights head-on, you will see their starbursts!!

CABIN LIGHTING PANEL: A panel on the forward side of the inside main Exit door frame houses the switches for CABIN LIGHTS and ENTRY LIGHTS
Individual seat Reading and Table lights:
Each seat comes with its own Reading (over the seat) light, and a Table light switch. In the case of the seats that face each other, the switched labeled TABLE both control the single overhead Table light for those seats.
Overhead Table and Reading Lights for each cabin Seat
Check the glow/color reflections of the cockpit at night!! — Exclusive AirSim3D THXp light system uses over 300 tuned light beams (not traditional flat lit textures)!!
Get back to the INDEX

INTERIOR CABIN (ONLY) LIGHTS MASTER SWITCH:
Just fore of the Pilots-side fuse panel is a large RED Cover, over the Interior Master Switch Labeled: INTERIOR MASTER OFF. Generally used in an emergency, if turned off then power to all lights in the Cabin are turned off.
Location of CABIN power/lights master switch

FUSE PANELS
There are 2 fuse panels located on each side of the cockpit. Their labels, placement are all real/authentic.
But, they do not animate/work. “Why not???”
         1) Performance: There are 143 breakers total. EACH would require manipulators, animation, and code to work. While that in of its self can be done, we were more concerned about the (ESPECIALLY) impact on FPS. All those lines of code and animation checks being calculated every second, slowly add up, fractions at a time. These fuse panels would have been a non-trivial FPS-eating chunk of functionality to add to what is already a fully animated cockpit.
         2) “yeah, but others do it”. Good for them. We hope that you will appreciate that our strategy is to develop for the widest band of computer perf found across the world. And FPS matters to many. This is simply one of those items that fall into the 5% of “not animated” in this jet. So be it.

We made the calculation that having static fuses is NOT something what would “break” our overall C-560XL immersion. You may disagree, and that’s OK. But as designers, we decided to use the FPS currency we save from not coding and animating 143 breakers, to instead apply it where it ENHANCED the immersion for MOST pilots — and so spent it elsewhere — more wisely — like having 300+ tuned light beams in the cockpit, as just one example of the tradeoff strategy — and THAT we felt was good-use of FPS currency that resulted in our spectacular nigh-flying experience for EVERYONE. As they said in Dances with Wolves .. “good trade”.

Electrical generators
There are 3 methods to generate electrical power to charge the 2 aircraft batteries and power the jet if the main battery is offline.
If the GPU and (Engine) GENs are on (assuming engine running) and the battery switch is also on, the sources constantly charge and maintain the main Battery to their max voltage, and this is normal.
For the APU to charge the Battery, the APU must be running, and its Generator switch must be on.
         1 GPU
         2 APU
         3 Engine-run GENS (L & R) found in the DC POWER section of the Electrical panel on the Pilots side Dashboard.
The GPU and APU are separate stand alone units unto themselves. They have their own units, panels, and usage-procedures as contained in this POH. However the L & R GENS only work when their respective engines are running. The (Engine) GEN switches (positioned to the R and L of the the main battery switch) should be turned to the off position when the engines are off.

1) GPU:

The GPU in this jet is a completely custom model based on the real-world example. It has PBR materials, exact labeling, and has a “refueling” function built in for an immersive GPU operations experience. No this is not your run-of-the-mill square, low resolution in-sim-object. Yes, the FMOD sounds you hear are custom recorded too.

The GPU can be used as a “free” source of always-available DC power for the aircraft.

In XP12, there is no need to “call or request” the GPU truck.

Access:
Open the small (proportionally-sized) well labeled access panel found aft of Baggage Panel labeled: EXT PWR RCPT 28 VDC
IN XP11, you must Drift from the interior to the exterior (through the cabin walls) to be able to access the Manipulator that can open the GPU door and click its panels for operations. This is not an aircraft bug, but the standard way XP11 works.
IN XP12, the sim has been fixed so that the manipulator can be accessed from any outside camera view. (so no need to start inside and then drift through the walls outside)
This is the main/only reason we did not turn “wall collision ” on — so you can get to the outside to operate the GPU.

Once the hatch is open, Move your mouse just a bit to change the manipulator shape to UP/DOWN, then click when the down arrow is displayed to connect/display GPU unit. 
If the GPU is connected, the Parking Brake will automatically be set simulating; what every real pilot does.
The PB can not be released until the GPU is shut down AND disconnected.
The GPU can not be disconnected unless it is shut down and its starter panel closed.
Running the GPU:
         Move to PORT side of the unit.
         Find and click the large glass panel covering the start panel, it opens. 
         Once open, click the upper half of the panel
         Press the GPU panel upper half to start the GPU… you will see 1 of 2 possible lights atop the unit:
If  you see a steady blue light: In real-life, the blue annunciation is a “low fuel” warning on this GPU model, and it will therefore not start.
In the C-560XL, if the Blue light randomly comes on when attempting to start the GPU. If this happens, you will need to wait for ~1 min to simulate that the GPU is being “refueled” by the ground service crew. Once “refueled” the Blue will extinguish, replaced with a flashing orange colored light, and the GPU will automatically start.
If you see a flashing orange light: GPU will start.
Once started, the GPU does not “run out” of fuel.

There is no “GPU connected” warning anywhere in the C-560XL. Its only affect will be to see the main battery being charged, or to remain charged with no APU running. 
Avoid running the GPU with engines running — its a safety risk.
Turn the GPU off by clicking the lower part of the main panel, or the Red Emergency stop button to its right. 

The GPU must be turned off, AND its front panel cover closed, before it can be disconnected by re-clicking the plug attach point on the fuselage, and closing its door. 
Above: GPU Starboard side. Notice also the APU Exhaust below the Starboard Elevator.
Outside Elements — Cones, Chocks Engine covers on.


Generally as long as the jet has over 22 volts, the jet can be started with the battery only. It is also a good practice to use only one Generator source at a time (unless called for by checklists) to avoid overheating the battery if it is being charged when it’s in a well-depleted charged-state.
Above: Authentic GPU modeling, with Start panel opened Baggage and Main Battery Compartments Open
Run the GPU if the engines are off, and you need to have the jet functioning in time for arrival of your passengers.
Run the APU only when the GPU is off and disconnected, and the Exit is closed (usually to cut down on the noise) while you prep the jet for flight, and your passengers settle down. See additional APU notes below (its fuel consumption, permissible altitude use etc.)
Location of GPU Access Panel: Connected and Access panel on unit opened.
Press the TOP half of the panel to start GPU: A BLUE light atop GPU is for Low fuel light, being fueled.
Yellow Light: Is operating.
You CAN NOT run the APU and GPU at the same time. (the APU master switch will not function)
Running them both prevents battery overheating and fire consequences on the jet! Fuel is costly, real pilots don’t do this (yes airliners do, but we are not a B777) and its not necessary anyway.

2) APU PANEL and OPERATIONS 

APU at night, Bleed Air Off Notice Real colored lights glow and reflections (there are not LIT textures)
Like many things in this aircraft, do not fall back to how you operated APU’s, or assume what they were used for, as you have done in other aircraft, especially in larger airliners.
Limits:
* The APU should not be started above FL200, nor run above FL300.
* This jet does NOT need the APU to start engines AS LONG AS the battery power is above 22-23 Volts indicated on the DC VOLTS gauge.
* DC POWER BATT ON switch MUST BE in the BATT ON position (Up) for the APU’s Master and other switches to work. (see special note XP12 on switch functionality below)
* The APU requires a minimum of 22V to start running. (and that may vary with altitude and temperature).
* If you find that the jet as inadequate voltage to get the APU started then use the external custom GPU to generate power to get aircraft systems started.
Features:
* APU is The APU has a real time cumulative-use meter on the panel. (Co pilot side, bottom left) to log APU use hours (the upper one similarly logs cumulative airframe time)
* In XP12: the jet is shipped with a custom external “exhaust flame”. Please refer to the installation readme if you want to set that up in your installation. its just a fun thigh and has no effect on operations.
Test before start:
Main Battery switch must be on for APU Start operations.
Then, Master on, press and hold the test button to run checks, observe annunciators as necessary.
SWITCH FUNCTIONALITY NOTE: There have been suggestions to “allow the switches to move even if the DC POWER BATT switch is NOT on”.
We considered this, but, in XP11 landed on NOT having the switches move (to indicating to you that something is not set up correctly).
We agree this may be different from what you are used to.
But we reasoned that if the switches move but did not function, we’d then get reports of “BUG: the APU is not working.”.
Caught between a rock and a hard place — freeze or move, we chose the former.
Folks are used to the APU simply turning on “in other aircraft” — which makes no sense because it needs power to work to begin with. But we are not going to do that just because its done elsewhere.
We therefore chose to have the APU MASTER AND START/STOP switches to freeze to indicate to the pilot that the APU’s electrical circuitry is not set up for the APU can work. The BLEED AIR and GENERATOR switches Do move, as they need to be positioned correctly for the Start to work once there is power to the panel.
You may agree or disagree with this decision, but there it is.
In XP12: Giving Customers what they wanted, we changed the APU Panel function so that its switches now moves even if DC power is off. (but nothing will happen).

Moving on… To start the APU: 
Turn the BATTY And AVIONICS switches on to be able to see the APU Panel lighted and for switches to work.
Also make sure the little Bleed Air switch (top left) is OFF (all the way down) and the Generator Switch is OFF (Middle position in XP11, Off in XP12). If these are not in the right position, the START switch will not work.
Master switch on, then click the Start switch (pull up) and **HOLD** it for >2 seconds, or until you see the RPMs kick in /sound starts. Release the switch.
Engage the APU Gens, or bleed air as needed by turning the BLEED AIR or GENERATOR switches ON when their annunciator lights switch on.

APU FUEL USE AND FUEL LOAD/LEVELS IMBALANCE:
The APU draws fuel from the right fuel tank only, so running the APU will use fuel from that side tank only. In flight this imbalance with the engines operating is not very noticeable. But if on ground with engines off and if run for a period of time, you will slowly begin to notice the difference between R and L tanks fuel levels.
To balance the aircraft:
IN XP11: Turn the APU off, then while taxiing, make sure the X-Feed dial (lower left Pilot side) is set to the center. That will automatically drain fuel from the left side to both running engines until the levels are equal and the jet will then automatically switch to draw fuel from each tank equally for each engine (assuming both engines are running) Or, you can turn the X-Feed dial to L, which will draw fuel from the L tank only. BUT BE SURE to center the X-Feed once the tanks are balanced (the X-Feed annunciator up front warns you that the X-Feed is operational.) if you forget and so the right side tank contains a higher level of fuel, simply turn the X-Feed to R to use fuel from that side.
IN XP12: Before or while Taxiing, and if you elect to keep the APU running, keep the X-Feed dial to Center or R. If you turn it to L with the APU running, that will starve Engines and the APU of fuel, and both will begin to shut down, because, when the APU is running, the L-side Fuel pump is off. Therefore, in order to balance the aircraft in XP12, you must first shut down the APU before using the X-Feed to balance the aircraft. This is true if you have the APU on while flying, or sitting on the ground. Unless you have an emergency when the Engine Gens have failed and you need the APU to charge the batteries, you really should not be Taxiing out flying with the APU running.
If you find the aircraft out of balance from running the APU for a length of time while setting up the flight, and once you are ready to go, then turn the APU off, and then turn the X-Feed dial to L.
Watch the fuel quantities in both tanks.
When the L reads equal to R, turn the X-Feed back to Center.
And remember, the aircraft is fully capable of Battery start if it has enough DC power, so there is no real reason to use the APU other than to charge depleted batteries or to start engines when the battery is depleted by turning the APU’s Bleed air ON.

And don’t obsess about wanting to see the exact numbers in both fuel tanks. The quantities do NOT need to be exact. A couple gallons off will not have any major impact of jet handling.

View more information about this in the CROSSFEED section.
To shut the APU down: This can be done only after the APU is FULLY up and running first, AND the aforementioned switches are in their Off positions) Click and hold the START/STOP switch to the DOWN/STOP position for 4+ seconds. Be patient: First see the the temp drop, THEN the RPMs will/should wind down. Release the switch so it springs back to the center.
Turn the Master switch OFF.
The APU should not be run over 30,000 feet, and start attempts should be made only below 20,000.

Take a minute to notice the real light glows cast from the APU panel at night!!
APU FIRE: 
Excessive high temperatures will cause an APU fire.
If there is a Fire, the APU FIRE annunciator will light, a loud horn will sound, and the EGT will rapidly increase.
The pilot has 2 choices to deal with and APU fire:
         1) Not recommended, but if nothing is done, at a certain temp or after 8 seconds, the jet will automatically fire the extinguished bottles; horn will silence, the fire will extinguish, and the APU is shut down.
         2) Recommended: press and release the APU FIRE button: The extinguisher fires, the horn is silenced, the APU is shut down

The APU is inoperable after a fire. It is only available again/reset after loading another (preferably default LR Aircraft) and then reloading the C-560XL, or restarting the sim.
APU Annunciations seen above DME instrument on the Co Pilots side of the Front instrument panel.
APU Running — Notice the sunlight/shadow contrast.
Bleed Air is On.
Notice also the Airframe Counter (top) and APU time-use counter (lower left)






Annunciator showing APU GEN is OFF (Lighted)

3) ENGINE GENERATORS
each engine has its generator which is cross tied to the main and emergency batteries. In other words, as long as the engine is ruining, any engine will charge the batteries. They may do so at higher rates when more the batteries are discharged, and depending on one or both gens are running.

Be careful of using multiple Gen sources to recharge depleted batteries as it may cause the battery to over heat (BATTERY TEMP) , especially when the ambient temps are high. Turning both gens off with engines running causes a Master Warning. Turn at least 1 gen on (DC POWER PANEL) to rectify.

BATTERY OVER-TEMPERATURE WARNING: (Batt O’Temp annunciator)
There is a battery temp gauge on the Co-pilots side of the dashboard, and a Batt O’Temp upfront annunciator
It is a serious flight safety risk if these warnings sound, (Master Warning Switch Light and horn) and must be managed immediately.
The cause of this is usually rapid recharging of a severely discharged Main Battery.  
Generally expect to see this happen (high rate of charging) (unless a failure somewhere) if the battery is fairly discharged, then both engine gens and APU is running.
TO SOLVE: use only one charging source (APU, GPU, engine GENS) to recharge a depleted battery to reduce the recharge rate (red line) to not cause the battery to overheat.
Generally, if using 3 sources on a battery that shows DC AMPS charging rate to be below the charging redline (300 Amps) should not trigger overcharging heat.

Get back to the INDEX

MASTER WARNING:
When Lighted, this Switch-Light is a priority to resolve asap.
If you see this, remember to first fly the jet. Keep it under control, then correct the fault indicated asap.
Blinking/steady behavior is the same as in MC above.  Example (on ground, idle, turn both L & R gens off — MW blink and Horn alert.)
MASTER CAUTION: 
Found on both Pilot and Co Pilot sides, these all-important advisory Switch Lights Blink (or are steady once clicked signifying Pilot awareness of the need to assess and resolve an issue)
They have associated fault Annunciator blinks if a systems warning condition/s exist.
(example: if the engines are running, Fuel Boost switches are OFF, the LO FUEL PRESS annunciators and the MC buttons will all blink)
Press the MC button (with the fault still on) and the MC will go off, and the LO FUEL PRESS ANNUN lights will become solid.
They will then will go off only when the abnormality has been rectified — in this case turning the FUEL BOOST switches ON.
MC has no sound alerts.
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
To see a full list of which annunciators trigger these lights in greater detail and for possible Resolutions, Go Here to the Annunciator Details and Guide Section. (its long!)
SUMMARY:
The jet’s primary Systems and Flight Status Warning and Alert center is the bank of 42 authentic annunciator warning lights placed on top of the main dashboard. 
99% of them work, some serve dual purposes, or if single, monitor L and R status individually.
Every one of its windows are glass coated, and their lights are custom designed, authentic per the real Jets POH, and are hooked into all aircraft systems/rotary test/Master Caution-Master Warn, and faults as needed.
COLORS AND HOW TO REACT:
RED these blinking annunciator warnings are a serious flight risk and need immediate attention. They trigger the Master Warning button to blink and a horn to sound. Clicking the MW button will silence the horn and cause both the MW and blinking Annunciator to turn Steady. The Steady warning annunciators will remain lighted until the condition is Resolved.
AMBER (blinking) alerts mean a system is active but not critical to flight safety. However, its cause needs to be understood and it needs your attention, and in some cases, it needs to be corrected. They trigger a blinking Master Caution with no sound. Clicking the MC will turn MC off, and the Blinking Annunciator will then turn Steady until the condition is corrected/changed/turned off etc. If the MC is blinking and the condition is fixed, both it and the blinking Annunciator will turn off. If the MC is off, an annunciator is steady, and a new annunciator light up, the process is repeated: MC blinks and the NEW annunciator will blink (while the older steady annunciators cancelled, will continue to remain steady)
WHITE is for pilot information, not critical. These usually turn off once the system has finished its work, or the system is back to its normal state (like deploying and retracting speed brakes). But there are some White that turn on and cant be resolved while in the air, like the AC Bearing as one example: the flight service crew will investigate and resolve once you are back on the ground and have exited the aircraft. They pose no flight risk and have no systems effect. Fun to see and understand though!

If the system has a L and R component, then they operate independently as L and R systems. For example, if Left Fuel Boost is on, then only the L side of the Annunciator will light up.

An annunciator may also share the same Annunciator window with another related system because they are closely related, but have different systems which need monitoring, and they may operate independently or in concert as necessary. For example, Low Brake Pressure and Antiskid.

EVERY annunciator on the panel has an X-Plane failure component… if a system fails, as in real-life, you may see one or a combination of annunciators light up.  This is true for 95% of all functions in the C-560XLS, and certainly 100% of all critical flight systems can be failed, and the correct sequence of procedures and steps must be taken to correct the failed condition, like in the real jet.

Certain Annunciators (like anti ice) follow real-world warm up cycles, so they may blink and go steady as they perform their functions like in the real jet. 

To see a full list of what each Annunciator means and its possible Resolution, Go Here to the Annunciator Details Section. (its long!)

Get back to the INDEX


Aircraft Ident and Modes:
To set Ident and MODE C as called for by ATC, use the 4 IDENT button functionality on the Lower end of the Primary RMU.
The Left button is for Power, and it will turn the IDENT to STB (Standby).
You may then use the ON button to turn IDENT on, the ALT button to transmit IDENT in Mode C. 
LOW SPEED ALARM
Maintain ASI >150kts at all times when gear is up, or low speed horn will sound. 

PRESSURIZATION:
The jets Authentic Pressurization system has 3 Modes selected by a combination of the switches and dials on the Center Console/Pedestal.

PRESSURIZATION PANEL.
Pay particular attention to the SET ALT window, controlled by the black knob to the immediate left of the dial.
Correctly reading and interpreting its numbers are critical to flight safety and are read as follows:
         There are 2 small vertically stacked, non-changeable zeros that represent units and tens in the SET ALT window.
         The Dial to the left sets the desired internal aircraft altitude desired by setting the 3 large numbers in that SET ALT window.
                  They need to interpreted as follows:
                           005 = 500ft
                           050 = 5000ft
                           500 = 50,000ft

So, if you set 500 in the main window, you are setting the internal aircraft to fly/be at 50,000 feet!! NOT 500 ft. You WILL black out once you start passing 10,000 ft. and Master Warning lights and horns will sound. THIS IS NOT A BUG.
You need to set the internal flying pressure of the aircraft to be BELOW 10,000 ft.

PRESSURIZATION SOURCES:
The large dial with the label PRESS SOURCE, allows you to select the ENGINE bleed air source for internal aircraft pressurization. Obviously the engines must be running to provide pressurization source. LH and RH use L and R engines for source (use in case of Fire in one side as an example), And EMER rapidly re-pressurizes the aircraft to some number <101 depending on the current alt of the aircraft.
Generally, this dial should be set to NORM with engines running, AND maintain >40 N1 for enough pressure (especially Low Pressure will result if on a long glide at high ALT and low N1)
MEANING AND INTERPRETION OF THE 2 HANDS IN THE PRESSURIZATION DIAL:
The Large hand of the dial shows you the the current internal pressure (the height at which) the aircraft is flying, and its read using the outer ring of numbers. it will usually be the same as set in the SET ALT window. UNLESS:
         1) there is a problem (like a pressure leak), and then it will travel to reflect the internal aircraft pressure (and the small hand will like wise move too)
         2) Depending on your altitude height, it has built-in pressurization profiles, and may travel to a number that’s not in the SEL ALT window. This is normal and designed to counter very low high altitude pressures, so as not to stress the aircraft body with too much of a pressure differential.
         BUT IN EITHER CASE: The significance of the large hand is that you never want to see it over 100 (10,000) since that’s a serious flight safety risk because then the internal aircraft altitude pressure is as if its flying ABOVE 10,000 AGL, and (if enabled in the sim) black out is inevitable! See the RED CAB ALT annunciator with blinking MASTER WARNING: section below for remedies.
The small hand shows the difference between the internal and external pressure and is read from the inner ring of numbers. So in our leak case above, and if the aircraft is at say 15,000 feet when there is a leak and this happens, the large hand will be on 10,000 and the small hand will be on 5,000 (1). If this happens at about 20,000 feet, the large will be on ~10,000 and the small will move to about the 10,000ft also (2) signifying 2 times more than safe alt of 10,000.
If there is no leak, and say the SET ALT number is too high (>101 which == 10,100 ft) then the large hand will continue to reflect outside ALT pressure, because there is no Pressurization taking place, and the small hand in this case will move to 0 signifying 0 pressure differential between inside and outside the cabin.
IN ALL CASES: The significance of the small hand is to NEVER allow it to go over the RED LINE signaling that the internal pressure is too great for the hull at the height its being flown, and hull integrity is being compromised — the aircraft is ready to pop like a balloon!! This ultimate failure is not modeled, but the remedy is to DECREASE the internal pressure/height (in other words INCREASE the height the cabin is flying at to lower the difference to take the pressure off the hull) — and of course correct the leak problem first (if possible), or get the hell down to a lower, safe alt under 10K as fast as possible.. Speed Brakes open (the are not spoilers!), idle, dive dive (but not over VNE!!) before you black out!

PRESSURIZATION MODES:
You have the option to use/set any of the 3 Pressurization modes that display in the SET ALT window:
         1) Automatic LANDING ALTITUDE (LA) Mode: With the white MANUAL/AUTO switch set to AUTO simply set the destination airport‘s Landing Alitiude by using the dial left of SET ALT window, and the System does the rest once airborne — the model is mapped to various Authentic Flight Level and landing configs. As you ascend and descend the jet automatically manages internal pressure, and upon landing will have matched the internal pressure to the  LA set.  Reach your destination’s Landing Alt pressure without any hassles!  Be aware, landing at high altitude airports will trigger CAB ALT Master warnings. 
         2) FLIGHT LEVEL (FL) mode: Click the FL button found next to the SET ALT window. Here you will set a desired FL for the jet cabin/cockpit interior. — this is the what the flight level will feel like for the passengers and crew. This is NOT used to set the external AGL/ FL the aircraft is/will be flying at!!  Generally this is only used to help small children and if on medical missions. This mode can not be set to be below 5000 ft, and there is NO upper limit. Be careful with this mode: If the SET ALT is mistakenly set to 500 (with the 2 small zero’s), this will cause a black out as the aircraft climbs past 10,000 since the SET ALT target is set to 50,000ft before the jet will begin to pressurize!  Generally this should be set to somewhere between 050 (5,000 ft) and 099 (9,900 ft).  Further this mode does not automatically track down to the landing field altitude; that will need to be managed manually by the Pilot, and if the LA is lower than the modes minimum of 5,000 ft, then then you must switch over to LA(Auto and dial in the LA being approached) or switch to full manual Mode to be able to manage internal pressures down to 0 pressure differential. 
In FL mode the Aircraft will gradually pressure to the internal altitude desired that’s set after, after takeoff.   Manage pressure settings up or down to ensure that the pressure differential (small hand on the dial) does not reach the red marker. 
         3) Manual — (CA) CABIN ALT is similar to the FL mode except that it is a completely manual mode, and the SET ALT can be set to internal altitudes of 0 ft. The desired internal alt is set by using the WHITE switch to MANUAL and then using the Red up/down spring switch to set the desired internal cab altitude. This mode does not track the landing airport altitudes and must be manually managed end to end.
EXER Button: No function for pilots (mechanics use this on-ground for aircraft maintenance)
RED CAB ALT annunciator with blinking MASTER WARNING: 
This is a serious flight safety risk. Black out (if enabled in the sim) is inevitable if not corrected asap.
The remedy: Click MW to turn the alarm off and for a steady light reminder that will only extinguish automatically once the CAB ALT alarm causes have been addressed and pressurization problems are no longer life threatening.
The root cause is that something is preventing the aircraft from pressurizing once airborne, or, the manually set pressure is too low (Higher than 10,000ft), or there is a fault in the PRESS SOURCE system.
Possible causes:
         * Main Door not closed/locked correctly (there should be a Door Seal warning)  Fix by: lock the door correctly.
         * Press Source Off.  Fix by: Turn PRESS SOURCE dial on
         * Emer Dump switch is on, Fix by: Turn EMER DUMP (red switch) off
         * Long idling glide at altitude: Assuming all the above are ok, performing a long, low power, high alt glide, with N1 <40% will cause the aircraft to not have enough bleed air pressure to maintain the internal safe pressure required. 
         Fix by: 
         1) First and (assuming engines running) turn PRESS SOURCE to EMER to begin rapid re pressurization, and keep it on until the problem is diagnosed/fixed, then turn to Norm.
         2) Unless you see the EMER re pressure working almost immediately — perform a rapid descend to <10,000 to avoid lethal black out (if you have that option turned on in the sim) with Speed Brakes to prevent over speeding. (THEY ARE NOT SPOILERS) while maintaining <260kts ASI
         3) Once black out is no more a concern assess cause factors/correct (list above) and correct or land as soon as permissible.

Get back to the INDEX


CABIN/COCKPIT TEMPERATURE PANEL: Panel below pressurization dial.
The temp window displays ambient temp in the Cockpit or Cabin (based on selector switch position directly below it) NOT outside air temp.
To set a desired Cockpit ambient temp: (same for Cabin-side temps setting too)
         * Move middle dial to SEL under the CKPT dial. (Or CAB for Cabin temp setting)
         * Now “set” a desired temp by turning the CKPT TEMP SEL (big dial) L for lower, R for higher
         * See the temp being set in the window
         * The Heater or Air Conditioner (A/C) will start automatically to reach the temp set.
         * There are no “packs” to turn on or off. The jet automatically turns the Heater or A/C cooling on and off as needed based on the desired Ambient Temperature Set.
Status indications:
Green= A/C or Heater has automatically reached the temp that was Set for the desired cockpit or cabin ambient temp (depending on the center dials position), and therefore no heating or cooling is currently taking place.
Blue = Cooling A/C is on: Temp Set is below cockpit or cabin ambient air temp
Red = Heater is on: Temp Set is above cockpit or cabin ambient air temp
Once the ambient cockpit (or cabin) temp desired has reached the Set temperature A/C and Heating turns off, and status will indicate green.

Move the dial to the CKPT (or CAB) positions to observe the ambient temp changing slowly (up/down as heated or cooled) to reach the temp you set when the dial was in the SEL position.
How much and at what rates this happens is determined by ambient OUTSIDE temp.
So if parked in a hot desert environment, it will take a while for the jet to cool down with the A/C, when compared to flying at 20K and setting a cooler inside ambient temperature.

Get back to the INDEX


COM / MICROPHONE AUDIO PANEL
In order to hear ATC, you must have the COM1 main button OUT and Lighted, AND its associated little speaker button, found just above the SPKR dial, pushed OUT. This simulates that the Microphone to talk is on (Big button) and the overhead cockpit Speakers are not MUTED so you can then hear Controllers and your responses.

You can also use COM2 and its speaker to talk/listen to a station tuned in the RMU. HOWEVER, the COM1 FREQ in the RMU must be tuned to the same frequency as COM2. In Xp11 you can not have 2 COMs active, and listen to 2 stations simultaneously. This is because XP only allows 1 Communication channel to be active to hear Controllers (tuned on the RMU — see topic below), This is not a bug, but the way XP is designed.

AS a work around, if you wish to listen to 2 channels, tune Com1 to its WHITE FRQ, and the 2nd FRQ you whish to listen to, to its BLUE, And then the SAME white and blue FRQ’s in the RMU to Com2 also. Then, when desired, move the channel you wish to hear to the WHITE for both Com1 and Com2 in the radio (so both FRQ’s are the same in the RMU) then you can use either Com1 or Com2 buttons to listen in. This is not a bug, but the way XP is designed.

IN XP12, beginning v1.4, you can tune 2 different COM stations in the RMU, and listen (RX) to them simultaneously (be sure their respective little speaker dials are popped OUT to cause the Speakers to be on to hear the tuned stations’ transmissions)

In both XP11 and 12, you can ONLY transmit (TX) to ATC on COM1. This is an X-Plane ATC limitation. A bug has been logged with them to get ATS to TX on both COM1 and COM2.

Clicking the HF1, CABIN, and EMER buttons automatically deselect other buttons if they are engaged to simulate the real com panel workings, but unfortunately aside from animating and lighting up, they don’t actually “do” anything as X-Plane has no way to simulate what these functions actually do in real-life.

Other small dials: the little headphone icon buttons, the HF1 ADF1, INHP, BOTH, DME1 DME2 and SPKR and HDPH dials animate but do no actual work.
NAV 1, 2 small dials if pressed will activate AP COURSE1 and 2 respectfully, but do not sound station MORSE.
If the Outer, Middle or Inner marker is actively pinging, then the MUTE button (left of MKR) can be used to turn marker sounds off.
The Panels on the Pilot and CP side are synced.

CLOCK:
There are 2 clocks which operate independently on the Pilot and Copilot sides.
The clock has 4 functions: click the SEL button to cycle/see:
         1) GMT (GMT)
         2) Local Time (LT)
         3) Flight Time (FT)
         4) Stopwatch with (ET) lap/ReSeT
FT – the FLIGHT TIMER automatically starts when the wheels are unloaded/airborne, and stops/pauses once back on ground.
AND it will incrementally begin automatically ADDING time if a touch and go is made during the same flight (unless FL is ReSeT).
The FT need not be on display — it records and keeps time in the background while other clock functions are used. (or if the Clock is even off)

Display shows a flight time of 1:13:46 times flight, that automatically started at wheels up, and “stop-watched” when Weight On Wheels. This could be now reset (RST), or, if another take off is made without RST, then the clock would CONTINUE to add time for the rest of the flight until back down Weight-On-wheels, when it would stop/pause again — and so on until it is reset, or the flight in the sim is terminated. Flight Time is not recorded anywhere.


2 main RMU’s each found on the Pilot and CO-pilot sides of the front panel.
Stand By Emergency RMU
RMU (Radio Management Unit) 
The Jet has 2, dual channel 2 Comm and 2 Nav channel RMU’s.
The larger of the 2 positioned on the Pilot and CP side are available on main battery only (BATT ON), and the smaller one on both main and EMER battery power.
The relevant Battery + Avionics switch must be on for the both RMU units to operate

The Main RMU:
The station which is on the side of the blue ball indicator, is the ACTIVE station (white text)
Click either of the “Switch Active” buttons in line with the active White text line, to switch between Comm station 1, 2  or VOR station 1, 2 as desired.
The Nav and Comm dials change the station frequencies of the inactive station (BLUE text) 
When desired, use the side ” – ” button to flip the inactive station to become the Active station. This is a good way to keep a FREQ on standby, and ready to be “flipped” up to becomes active (Make sure the ball is on the side you are managing)

To change ATC/TCAS and ADF frequencies, position the mouse just above each number you wish to change to increase, or below the number to decrease it. Watch the cursor change as up or down arrows on the screen vertically aligned to each number, to click to increase/decrease it.
Those Frequencies are always “Active”.
Other small buttons SQ, DIM, 1/2, STO are interactive/light, but really don’t “do” any work.

The XPDR button must be on and display a green light for the unit to have power to transmit or receive signals.
By default, the STBY button is lit showing the unit has power, but it it is NOT transmitting aircraft Ident at this point.
Click ON to begin to transmit the Ident code you have set under ATC/TCAS but without ALT data
Click ALT to be transmitting Mode C (Ident + ALT) — especially useful for real time online ATC-VATSIM scenarios, as those real-life ATC’s need location and altitude transmission to direct the virtual airspace
STANDBY COMM/NAV radio — Available in Regular and Emergency Battery mode (This is the real-jet behavior too)
The main RMU and Stand By units remain sync at all times.
Select Com or NAV focus by PRESSING top/center of Dial (Hand manipulator)
A small triangle displays Radio’s focus (so if pointed to NAV, white frequency is Active, Blue is standby)
Flip Blue button vert to flip Active/Standby focus
Flip Blue button Horz to flip between radio #1 and #2  (1, and 2 indicators are always above COMM)
ROTATE (Arrow manipulator) lower and upper half’s of the dial to change the frequency that is in focus
In XP12: Pressing the EMER and then the SQ buttons automatically sets the ATC frequency to the emergency frequency of 7700

DME

The aircraft Distance measuring Equipment features 2 instruments, Pilot and Co-pilot side and are synchronized to display Data from VOR1 or 2, of the GPS as dialed in the SELECT dial.
DME — left of the PFD
DME: 
Tune VOR/ADF stations using either RMU or Stand By radio
If in range, unit displays:
         * Station ID
         * Distance to
         * Time to
         * Closing speed
The display only displays 1 station at a time – that which is set in the PFD control panel focus (Nav1/Nav2 Button)
Unit also displays GPS distance, time, speed data if a flight plan is loaded. Access by pressing the GPS button on the PFD control panel.







ANTI ICE

The C-560XL’s Anti ice follows an Authentic aircraft warm up time-process and annunciators.
The warm up process takes into account various aircraft and environment factors and so the warm up period may take anywhere from a short time to over 4 minutes in cold environments as should be expected in the real jet.
Icing on the aircraft will affect performance if the Anti ice is not on/warmed up, so plan for anti icing functions to account for these warm up periods.
For the Anti Icing system to work, the system must have bleed air available from a running engine state; Source select using PRESS SOURCE dial in Center Console/Pedestal.
IN XP11: If you have both wing and engine anti ice switches off, and you are using the AUGMENTED MODE, and when flying through icing conditions, the WING ANTI ICE annunciator (bottom far right position on the Annun panel) will blink to tell you that the jet has started to ice up.
If you are flying REALISTIC MODE, there is NO WING ANTI ICE annunciator icing annunciation — just like the real aircraft.
IN XP12: Same as XP11, but with a different annunciation sequence:
If in AUGMENTED MODE, and the aircraft is in daylight, you will see the WING ANTI ICE annunciator flash
If in AUGMENTED MODE and at night, there is NO WING ANTI ICE annunciator, however, you will see the 2 anti ice red warning lights glowing (positioned just at the base of the front down tube) will glow.
BTW, those lights, like EVERY one of our lights, are real 3d bulbs… we have no fake 2D photoshopped LIT textures anywhere in the aircraft. Only real 3D lights and lighting glows!
IN REALISTIC MODE, only the anti ice annunciators will glow at night.

If you fly into icing conditions, and have not taken planned measures to manage Icing by having the ANTIICE/DEICE switches on for the various parts of the aircraft in time for them to heat up, 2 things will happen:
         1) Your Windshield will progressively fog up
         2) Ice will build on the aircraft (XP does not visually show this), and you are at severe risk of loosing control and crashing.

To mitigate death by Icing:
First lets just be frank — if you have have been a bad-monkey pilot and not planned for icing conditions along your route, and it does occur to the point where you are seeing annunciations because your systems are all off, you are already behind the curve. Ice has ALREADY begun to build and degrade aircraft performance.
Immediately turn all Icing systems on, and ensure your PRESS SOURCE bleed dial is set to NORM… so: Windshield overrides on, WS air on, TAIL AUTO on, and Wing/Engine switches in the ANTI ICE / DEICE section of the center panel — all on asap.
And pray.
Hopefully the system will warm up soon enough (and that all depends on external factors like ambient air and the amount of icing already accumulated) to be able to melt/reverse the icing (again that also takes time depending on the amount already accumulated)
Sure signs of aircraft performance are:
— Sluggish, non-responsive yoke inputs
— Underpowered/non-responsive engines
— Weird Speed/ALT readings
Also, fly into weather with the WX radar on (MFD WX button) .. use it to fly away/around/descend from the bad weather if possible, or try to fly into clear spaces (so there is not more ice being added), or descend into clear air, and wait for the system to heat up. Hopefully you will have enough control to do all this while the system heats up.
Also, In the daytime, watch the Windshield — fogging is a sure sign that ice is building even if you do not see the annunciators mentioned. in that case turn WS on and WS Air on asap. That should clear the WS, but definitely ALSO, turn the Anti ice WING/ENGINE and TAIL AUTO switches on/Auto.
Hope there is enough time for the systems to heat up (see the Annunciator Guide section for WINDSHIELD AIR, TAIL AUTO, WS and WING/ENGINE ANTI-ICE explanations)
At night, the red annunciation will go off once the threat is over. (but NOT as soon as/when the Anti Ice switches are turned on, remember, they take time to heat up their surfaces and only then can they begin to reverse icing)

TOE BRAKES: If using Brake pedals L and R for differential braking, pushing both forward brakes the jet equally on both sides. More depressed = more brake force applied.
If fully depressed, you MUST release both brakes at least 1/3 of the way, to enable nosewheel steering and diff braking again.
You should not simply release one from the full depressed position, while one is fully depressed, and expect the jet to turn.
Rudder bias Test:
This is a test performed on ground prior to TO. See the checklist for step by step process.   
Summarized: Both engines must be running with the Park Brake on.
Then, with one side throttle at full idle (verify your N1 is stable), SLOWLY, advance the other throttle up, but not above 70 N1! 
Notice the opposite rudder pedal will move proportionately to N1.
Throttle back.
WAIT for the RPM of the engine just checked to spool down get to Idle — watch N1. The pedals will keep in sync with the engines rev’s.
Once stable at idle, notice the pedals HAVE NOT returned to even. This is by design so you know you are still in the test. Advance the throttles again if you wish, the rudder follows.
If you are done with that side, and with both engines at idle, TAP (either one) of the Rudder pedals.
Notice the pedal will snap to center and out of the Test mode — you are now back to normal Rudder function.
Repeat the other side.
Always wait for the throttle rpms to get back to idle, and tap the rudder pedals to reset them out of rest mode.
FPV
Flight path vector in PFD when in the air continuously computed the aircrafts Vert/hoz vector — usually found in HUDs, but why not!
COFFEE STAIN
Yeah the previous pilot spilled his drink; slob!  … services will clean later.

Get back to the INDEX


EXITs:

***************
NOTE: IN XP11 YOU MUST BE RUNNING VULKAN to see OUTSIDE click areas (like outside Main door handles, Battery, GPU, and Baggage compartments, GPU panels etc.) when in outside camera views. 
IF you are using OpenGL, then the only way to access those panels is to be in an inside view, then “float or drift” through the aircraft fuselage to the outside and then the click areas will be available.
This is a XP limitation, nothing to do with the jet.
In XP12 the sim fixed this behavior… you will see manipulators when in outside camera view, no need anymore to float through the walls when in inside camera view.
***************


LAV door

To Open:
1) Find the small button midway of the door. Click to unlatch.
2) Move to handle area then click that to begin to slide the open automatically. (this is not a hand slide-able/drag door)
Return and stow the door in the open position, or else you’ll see a cockpit warning Annunciator that the door is still open.
When the Lav door is stowed correctly in the open position the door is flush with the bulkhead, and all Lav door annunciators in the upfront annunciators panel are off.
Opened and latched Lav door. Notice that its flush with the Bulkhead.
Unlatched Door. This will trigger a Lav. door Alert in the cockpit.
Closed Lav Door. Instructions to open and close are provided near the 2 handles.
Inside the LAV:
a) Wet wall — manipulate door to open/close — it only opens partially by design. 
Why only part way? Usually this cabinet contains water emergency gear, cleaning supplies. The team decided to save FPS since this art to depict all that would need to be quite large to be sharp and clear. There is no need for that gratuitous FPS expenditure.
b) EMERGENCY exit (inside Lav, Starboard side)
         1) click glass cover to remove
         2) Turn handle.  That’s as much will be offered. Blowing out the Exit door in not going to be done/offered.  Again, the the team decided to save FPS and unnecessary code. 
         3) Return handle to center and replace glass (or annunciator warning in Cockpit)

IN XP12: Find the custom Lights panel in the lav (just right of the Seat) to turn its lights and Instant Water heater (3 settings) on/off.
The “Mirrors” have been removed — XP does not render mirror reflections well.

MAIN door/Exit:

Pre catch release options OUTSIDE
INSIDE. Push button to release Precatch … Travels INward.
Locks Panel Shows Pins Unlocked.
         TO OPEN:
1) OUTSIDE: Find pre catch release button left of handle, or press keyhole. Handle releases (Pops out)
Move handle Down to open — door will swing down/open. 
To close the door, click the handrail (fore of steps) — It will move up, then down, then the door will beg to close.
It does this little jiggle to simulate what happens in the real jet — the operator must first pull that handrail up to unlock the door from its Down/locked position, then push the handrail back down, which unlocks the step so the door can be then closed. This is to prevent children from playing with the door — trying to lift it from the lower step while it is open. (its happens!!) Once unlocked, the door is free to be lifted up to its closed position manually by the operator. The door is VERY well balanced door, so its very easy to swing it up to close once unlatched by the handrail-lift. So we simulate that “lift-to-unlatch”. Another checkmark for realism!
Once closed, turn Handle Up to the Lock position, and back down again to the center position.
Then press center button on handle to push handle back in to recess and fully lock the door. If the door remains unlocked/open you will see a Door Seal Warning Annunciator in cockpit AND the cabin will not seal for altitude (no takeoff condition)
         2) INSIDE: 
         TO OPEN: press button above handle to unlock, the handle release pops IN. (pre catch lever on door frame is not functional) 
Turn large handle in the open direction. The door then swings down to open automatically.
         TO CLOSE (from in or outside) — click on solid handrail on the fore side of the steps door.
In the closed (but unlocked position) turn the handle to the LOCKED position, then back up again to the center position.
Then push the button (which should be IN). This will pop the button OUT and the Handle in simultaneously.
The door is now locked and sealed.
 You ** MUST** lock doors and stow the release buttons prior to flight.
If not done correctly, annunciators will light up on the annunciators panel, and the aircraft will not seal for high altitude — which will have its own set of Master Warnings and flight safety consequences. 
When the main Exit is closed correctly, the handle and release buttons are flush, and all cabin door and Seal annunciators in the upfront annunciators panel are off.

Baggage door:

The compartment is to be found outside and aft of the jets Battery Panel.
Opening the door causes the Baggage Cart to appear.  
Click the bags that are INSIDE the hold. 
Stand back while Wizardry unloads them! 
To return bags to the hold, click the bags on the cart and they will be loaded again.
Get back to the INDEX  

EXTERNAL ELEMENTS: (Chocks, Cones, Flags, Engine covers, Pilots/Pilot bodies in the cockpit)
The C-560XL can at any time display any combination of Chocks, Safety cones, External Avionics Flags, and Engine covers in an outside view of the jet.
What is displayed is controlled by the Jet monitoring numerous interconnected, inter-dependent systems and ”states” it is in, at any one time, like, (but not limited to) what state the Jets throttles and engine N1 is, what is physically connected to the jet, the state of systems and functions related to the avionics, battery connections, what running, and what’s not etc. etc. 

This results in over 70 “scenarios” that then dictates what it displayed. It is not as simple as “if the Parking brake is on, then the chocks should be displayed too”. Ummm … what then happens if the pilot pulls the Parking Brake while waiting on the taxiway in line for departure?  Chocks displayed? Not realistic. You can be guaranteed of one thing though; the engine covers will never display if N1 > 0.

Pilots are viewable at all times in XP11.
In XP12, they only appear in the cockpit when it makes sense/they are expected to be present in the cockpit, so when its appropriate — yours to look to find out when <smile> 

You can not remove elements if you are simulating a walk-around.
Why?
         1) There is no walk around mentioned in the checklists, and then, what if the pilot did not do the walk around? Yes. the team could have worked this out in more, added code, but every bit of code slowly eats into FPS, and therefore the Team decided on a less complicated, good-enough, method and implemented the simpler “managed scenarios” option.
         2) Pilots do add/remove engine covers as a last/first operations task, and sometimes, avionics flags too, but they generally never remove or place chocks and cones — that’s done by ground services. 
Business jets are between Airliners and pure GA (where a pilot does everything).
So if we gave the C-560XL pilot the ability to remove remove engine covers and flags via an in-cockpit tab, but then not be able to remove chocks and cones coz that’s the ground crews jobs, then that would confuse everyone — why give one without the other ?? Then we will get reports of — found a Bug!! :))
So we went the consistency route… let ground services place and remove everything. (and most importantly these events are consistent with that not being mentioned in the cockpit checklists anyway)
Different persons will have differing views about this, but that was our logic and the way it is. This jet is different.
And about “pushback” scenarios. This is not part of the 70 scenarios we looked at. Because, unlike airliners who drive into one-way-in-out airport gates, 99.9% of all biz jet ops are at FBO’s who have drive-in-drive-forward-out ramp gates. Added (and this is for the more tech-minded, there is no XP dataref for this, which means we’d have to invent some trigger, that would be then dependent of all the 3rd party pushback plugins recognizing our unique trigger — too complicated and risky for the end user experience. Therefore, the C-560XL does not support the pushback scenario.
Known visual issue: 
A pilot may notice that when parked at the gate, things like the bases of cones and GPU wires etc. may, at certain Airport locations, look a bit “sunk” into the ground surface. This is not a bug.
The issues is caused by the unevenness of X-Planes underlying mesh elevation at these “uneven” ramp locations. 
Generally major airports that have flat ramp areas will not have/display this issue.
CABIN ELEMENTS :
Window shades open/close. Seats recline (except the 2 in the rear, and entry facing seat). Tables extend and retract like found in the real jet.
The Emergency exit’s glass cover may be removed and handle turned, but the exit does not blow open … a design choice made to save code and fps since its a really edge scenario and would be used by 1% maybe 1% of the time.
Fore of the main door frame when viewing the door inside the cabin, find a lights panel for CABIN LIGHTS and ENTRY LIGHTS. These follow the real jets lighting system exactly.
The door lock panel pins will display red if the door is not properly shut — annunciators in the cockpit warn of this condition, and aircraft pressurization will not be possible.
Each seat has an overhead seat light, and a synced (to that seat-station) table light. (found on the aircraft wall or on the side of the seat for the Exit-facing seat)
In XP11, the overhead seat light for the chair facing the main door is the only one in the cabin that swivels. Further, swiveling any other light in the cabin swivels only that one over the exit seat by design. While this may seem odd, this is another case where this function would be performed by 1% maybe 1% of the time, so we did this just to demonstrate a moving light, to save code and FPS for the rest.
XP12: With the requirements to have higher power machines, now all overhead Lights and Vents are animated.
Emergency floor and cabin lights turn on when the EMER switch (dashboard) is set to ON, with the center LIGHTS switch for Passenger Safety set to PASS SAFETY LIGHTS ON. 
This also turns on wing walkway and “shark” lights to light the area fore of the starboard area where the leading edge meets the fuselage.

Get back to the INDEX


ROTARY TEST:
Fully functioning Rotary Test dial
Just below the throttle levers is the place for you to conduct instrument and systems Tests. The tests can conducted with or without engines running, but it should ONLY be done when on the ground. Further, if you are being diligent about following the Checklists, then this Test will be a part of your Preflight activity.

You conduct this test by turning the dial clockwise, to each “station” in turn as there are numerous items to verify to see if all is well with the jets’ systems. 
Prior to conducting the test, it is advisable (but not mandatory) to create a cleared set of upfront annunciators (except GRND IDLE), but if you are following the checklists, the jet will be set up to perform this test correctly.

IN XP12: the dial also emits real-jet sound recordings for each test station as needed.

Turn the TEST dial clockwise to each station in turn, observe the tests, interact with the MCaution, MWarnings, and other alerts as called for in the Station-descriptions below to enable the jet to conduct its internal checks.
1) OFF—The red TEST light is extinguished, and the test system is shut off. 
2) FIRE WARN—Both red ENG FIRE lights illuminate, indicating continuity.
3) DG GEAR—The green NOSE, LH, and RH lights and the red GEAR UNLOCKED lights illuminate, and the gear warning horn sounds.
4) BATT TEMP—BATT O’HEAT/>160° annunciator illuminates, the MASTER WARNING lights flash (cancelable), and the battery temperature gauge indicates 160°F.
5) STICK SHAKER— The AOA gauge needle swings to the top of the red band.
In Augmented dashboard mode: The AOA indexer initially illuminates then extinguishes the amber chevron followed by the green “donut” leaving only the red chevron flashing.
In Realistic dashboard mode: The AOA indexer initially illuminates then extinguishes the amber chevron followed by the green “donut” leaving the red chevron flashing with the yellow “dot”
6) T/REV—Both thrust reverser indicators, ARM, UNLOCK, and DEPLOY lights illuminate. MASTER WARNING lights flash (cancelable).
7) W/S TEMP —  NOTE: The the RT-W/S TEMP test should only be conducted once per rotation. The RT dial MUST be cycled back to Off, and then back again to its station before another W/S TEMP should be conducted. Moving the dial a couple of stops stop over or under and back to the W/S TEMP test will not produce reliable test, by design.
Conducting test prior to engine start,  with both Windshield heat selected OFF, the W/S O’HEAT L–R annunciators illuminate steady for 3 to 4 seconds, then turn off
Conducting test prior to engine start,  with both Windshield heat selected ON,  the W/S FAULT L–R and W/S O’HEAT L–R and annunciators illuminate steady
Conducting test after engine start,  with both Windshield heat selected OFF, the W/S FAULT L–R and W/S O’HEAT L–R annunciators illuminate steady, then after 3 to 4 seconds W/S FAULT L–R will extinguish
Conducting test after engine start,  with both Windshield heat selected ON, the W/S FAULT L–R and W/S O’HEAT L–R annunciators illuminate steady, then after 3 to 4 seconds W/S O’HEAT L–R will extinguish
8) OVER SPEED—The avionics power switch must be ON for valid test indications.
    The following indications occur:
        • Audible overspeed warning signal sounds
        • PFD 1 and PFD 2:
        • 265 KIAS (with red max speed limitation pole)
        • 5,000 feet altitude
        • 2,000 feet fpm descent
Standby Artificial horizon:
        • 265 KIAS
9) ANTISKID—The ANTISKD INOP annunciator flashes for 6 seconds, then extinguishes. The MASTER CAUTION lights illuminate steady (cancelable).
10) ANNU—The avionics switch must be on for valid test indications:
        • All lights on the annunciator panel illuminate
        • MASTER WARNING and MASTER CAUTION illuminate (not cancelable)
        • All lights on the auxiliary annunciator switch panel illuminate
        • Flight director selector mode buttons illuminate left to right and remain steady
        • PFD 1 and PFD 2: • YD OFF
        • All five autopilot control panel lights illuminate
        • Augmented or Realistic dashboard mode: AP panel Buttons steady
        • Engine Instrument panel:
                 — “all 8’s”
                — ITT Temp flashes alternating red/white lights
        • A steady altitude alert tone sounds
11) AVN —The avionics switch must be ON for the avionics check. The following indications are present:
• Annunciator panel (these lights flash):
                 — RADOME FAN
                 — CHECK PFD 1
                 — CHECK PFD 2
   • MASTER CAUTION illuminates (cancelable)
  • Not Annunciator panel (these lights flash)
                 –Flight director selector, APU GEN, PFD1/2 buttons
                 –Augmented mode: AP and LOW buttons
                 — Realistic mode: AP and MFD mode buttons on Center Console/Pedestal 
                 –Flight director selector, APU GEN, PFD1/2 buttons
        • In PFD 1 and PFD 2:
                 –AP OFF (steady)
                 –ROL TRIM (flash)
                 –PIT TRIM (flash)
        •  Auxiliary annunciator buttons panel (below Engine Instruments) all flash
        •  All five autopilot control panel lights flash
        • A steady altitude alert tone sounds
12) SPARE—Not used.

Get back to the INDEX


ANNUNCIATOR PANEL DETAILS: Colors, Interpretation and Resolution

System and flight status annunciators — the large panel above the Main Dashboard. 99% work!!

ANNUNCIATOR PANEL:
The aircraft is equipped with an extensive array of Annunciators.
There are 42 windows that display warnings and faults in this panel alone, and many windows serve a dual purpose or monitor R and L performance for a total of over 90 possible flight and systems status annunciators.
99% of them work as noted in the notes below.

WINDOW SURFACES AND LIGHT GLOWS:
As you can see from the image, every window has a glass face (reflects cockpit background in a special way that is non-intrusive) and their surfaces are designed to reflect sunlight (see top left half brighter), but then in shadows they become darker. But when Lighted, notice the glow they cause around the window frames/edges.
If it is a dual purpose window, and only half an annunciator lights up, then whichever half is lighted casts light to its portion of the frame, in whatever color is being beamed from the annunciator itself! See the Amber NO TAKEOFF Annunciator for an example of “half lit” in the image — its top half is White annunciator.

ANNUNCIATOR COLOR GUIDE AND HOW TO REACT:
RED annunciators need immediate attention and Cause a Master Warning (MC). Fly the jet first, but deal with the situation ASAP. These are reserved for serious flight safety risks. The MW will be “cancellable” to stop the flashing to steady (and the annunciator will become steady too), but they will only extinguish once the underlying fault is fixed. If another red warning triggers with the MW still steady (fault not fixed) then the MW and the new-triggered red annunciator will start the blink-cancel-steady cycle again for the MW and the new triggered annunciator.
AMBER is for your attention, non-critical. Master Caution (MC) will flash and they follow the same re-trigger behavior for the RED above. Fly the jet first, assess and understand, then act as needed.
Steady Amber, with no MC, is just a sign that a system has been turned on, or is operating in the background as designed. This in normal.
A blinking Amber with NO MC or MW is a sign that a system is not set up correctly for the current flight phase. Follow the guide below for the annunciator exhibiting the behavior to know how to resolve what the blinking behavior is communicating.
WHITE is FYI only, not critical. These can sometimes be fixed while the jet is flying, other not so.
RED and AMBER annunciators cause flashing MW and MC, which are cancellable with a press, and then cause the MW, MC AND the problem Annunciator (if its also flashing) Lights to turn from flashing to Steady.
But they will not extinguish until the problem (the annunciator that fired the Warning) is Resolved.
If the Lights are Steady and another problem occurs the MW or MC as the case may be, will flash begin to again, being cancellable to Steady, and so turn all lights steady until the problems are resolved.

Annunciators on the panel have X-Plane failure components … if a system fails, as in real-life, you may see one or a combination of annunciator light up.  This is true for 95% of all functions in the C-560XLS, and certainly 100% of all critical flight systems can be failed, and the correct sequence of procedures and steps must then be take to correct the failed condition, like in the real jet.

Certain Annunciators (like anti ice) follow real-world warm up cycles, so they may blink and go steady as they perform their functions like in the real jet… see the guide for those details to learn study, and prepare for.

As an example: Plan to turn the anti ice on ahead of time and before you enter icing weather — it takes time to heat up, and if you enter icing conditions before it heats up, then that’s bad piloting, all bets are off. 


ANNUNCIATOR GUIDE:
Most of the text in this section is reused from the Real POH. However some editorial license has been exercised to provide you with more context/Explanations for a better SIM experience (with added links in some cases)
Real lighting (not flat 2D Lit textures)
Illuminated Master Warning and Caution Light Switches.

MASTER WARNING:
Both Pilot/Co Pilot side Switch Lights flash to alert of critical flight risk and is triggered when the following are lighted:
Red Cab ALT.
Both L and R GEN are OFF annunciators (dual generator failure).
Amber thrust reverser ARM and UNLOCK lights inflight.
NOT Triggered by: ENGINE FIRE light.
The illumination of a single MASTER WARNING indicates master warning system malfunction.
See individual annunciators in the list BELOW toRESOLVE

MASTER CAUTION:
Both Pilot/Co Pilot side Switch Lights illuminate to alert the crew to a caution condition.
Flashing amber and white annunciators usually trigger the MASTER CAUTION switch lights.
Steady amber and white annunciators do not trigger the MASTER CAUTION switch lights.
The illumination of a single MASTER CAUTION switch light indicates a malfunction of the master caution system.
See individual annunciators in the list BELOW toRESOLVE

Refer to the related topic above: ANNUNCIATOR COLOR GUIDE AND HOW TO REACT

Batt O’Temp: Battery Over Temperature

Flashes if the battery is too hot.
Temperature has reached 145°F. If battery temperature reaches 160°F or greater, both annunciator segments (>160° and BATTERY O’TEMP) flash.
This annunciation is triggered by a dedicated sensor independent of the battery temperature gauge. Because the battery temperature gauge uses a separate sensor, the gauge can be used to check the
validity of the red annunciator.
RESOLVE:
Click MW Switch Light to silence horn and make Light Steady. MW Steady light /no horn will Turn off once the trigger above is resolved.
Usually rapid re-charging caused by using multiple charging sources (GPU, APU or GENS) on a run down/depleted battery.
Run only one generator source –GPU or APU or GENS to reduce recharging rate.


Cab Alt: Cabin Altitude

Flashes if the INTERNAL Cockpit/Cabin altitude is >10,000 feet.
Illumination occurs at 14,500 feet if the pressurization controller detects operation out of, or into a high altitude airport (8,100–14,000 feet) and the aircraft is below 24,500 feet.
RESOLVE:
Click MW Switch Light to make Light Steady. MW Steady light will Turn off once the trigger above is resolved.
PRESS SOURCE Dial to EMER.
Ensure Door is locked AND sealed (DOOR SEAL annunciation should be OFF).
Turn EMER DUMP OFF.
FLY to below 10,000 Alt as soon as possible. DEPLOY Speed Brake as needed.


LO Oil Press: Low Oil Pressure

Flashes if oil pressure is below 20 psi.
Illumination is triggered by a dedicated pressure switch. Because the oil pressure gauge uses a separate sensor, the pressure gauge can be used to verify the validity of the red annunciator.
RESOLVE:
Click MW Switch Light to silence horn and make Light Steady. MW Steady light /no horn will Turn off once the trigger above is resolved.
If this lights with engine running, indicated engine failure. Extinguish Fire if/as needed, shut down the effected engine. Land as soon as possible.
If this lights with engines normal but not running, starting the engine will start pump and resolve low oil pressure. (this last condition does not work in V1, scheduled for update in V1.0 TBD — note to be removed once released)


LO HYD Flow: Low Hydraulic Flow

Flashes if the hydraulic fluid flow rate is below normal.
Steady illumination normally indicates a pump failure on the effected side.
RESOLVE:
Read the HYDRAULICS section for EMERGENCY PROCEDURES


LO HYD Level: Low Hydraulic Level

Flashes for a low fluid quantity in the hydraulic reservoir (fluid quantity is 74 cu. in. or below) caused by a hydraulic leak
MC flashes, Cancelable.
RESOLVE:
Click MC Switch Light to make Light Steady as a reminder the condition exists. MC Steady light will Turn off if/once the trigger above is resolved.
Land as soon as possible so Ground Service can resolve the Leak.

Sneaky cheat if desired: Change dataRef sim/cockpit/misc/hydraulic_quantity and sim/cockpit/misc/hydraulic_quantity2 as needed back to 0.85 to cancel the Lo level light (assuming there is no Leak Failure).
If you don’t know/understand what it all means, or how to do this, Don’t do it. Please first learn about a higher level of Sim use to find and make Dataref changes using available Dataref Tools.


LO HYD PRESS: Low
Hydraulic Pressure

Steady illumination indicates the hydraulic system is in use. This illumination is normal when systems using Hydraulics is in use (like speed brakes as an example).
Steady also if Hyd. Quantity is less than normal, or there is an Engine Fire.
The light will remain on if there has been a dual Hydraulic Pump failure (L & R engines)
Illumination may also occur when there is no apparent system in use. This is normal. The Light will extinguish in time.
Illumination extinguishes when the respective subsystem operation is complete and when the Pressure is at the normal level
Flashing illumination inflight indicates the hydraulic system has remained pressurized for 40 seconds.
There is no MC Switch Light.
RESOLVE:
Read the HYDRAULICS section for EMERGENCY PROCEDURES


STAB MIS COMP: Stabilizer/Flap handle MisCompare

Flashing illumination occurs anytime the Flap handle and Stabilizer are not in agreement for the Flap 0-1 or 1-0 operation. The light will extinguish once the stabilizer has moved to the correct position (Flap handle agreement). This may take up to 30 seconds.
Flashing illumination occurs if the aircraft has exceeded 200Kts with the flap handle > 0
MC flashes, Cancelable.
RESOLVE:
Wait for the Elevator to slowly jackscrew into place. Read more about this operation.
If flying above 200KIAS, and flaps not == 0 then reduce airspeed to < 200 KIAS. Once < 200 KIAS, retract flaps.
Wait for StabMisc to go off before accelerating >200 kts


SPD BRK EXTEND: Speed brake Advisory

Advisory—Steady illumination indicates the left and right speed brake panels are fully extended.
This condition contributes to the NO TAKEOFF annunciation.
No MC
RESOLVE:
Retract speed brakes as needed. These are not spoilers.


ENG VIB: Engine Vibration Advisory

Advisory—Steady illumination indicates a vibration has been detected in the respective engine.
No MC
RESOLVE:
Monitor for abnormal performance in affected engine, if so land asap.
Get ground services to inspect engine after landing


OIL FILTER BP: Oil Filter

Flashes to indicate oil filter contamination.
The respective oil filter is partially or completely blocked.
Bypass is impending.
The filter may or may not be bypassing.
MC flashes, Cancelable.
RESOLVE:
Monitor for abnormal performance in affected engine, if so land asap.
Get ground services to inspect engine after landing


GRND IDL: Ground Idle Advisory

Advisory—Steady illumination indicates the aircraft is on the ground with one or both engines in ground idle mode with N1 <23%
Both EEC switches must be in AUTO for illumination monitoring
RESOLVE:
Increase N1 > 23%
Set EEC switches to AUTO as needed


NO TAKEOFF: No Take Off

Steady illumination indicates the aircraft is on ground and improperly configured for takeoff.
No MC
RESOLVE:
• Flaps in takeoff range (7 or 15°)
• Speed brakes retracted
• Pitch trim in takeoff (TO) range
• Stab mis compare in progress, Wait until the Flap and Stab is in agreement and STAB MIS COMP is off
Follow checklists


P/S HTR: Pitot, Static, and AOA heater

On Ground:
• PITOT AND STATIC switch OFF: Steady illumination; Turn Flashing if throttles advanced >37%; MC steady, Cancelable.
• PITOT AND STATIC switch ON:
• • No Illumination
• • Flashing if throttles advanced >37% during ground handling/Taxi with the NO TAKEOFF condition active.
MC flashes, Cancelable, will extinguish, and the P/S HTR and STBY P/S HTR and AOA HTR FAIL will continue to blink
RESOLVE:
Reduce N1 < 37%
Turn PITOT AND STATIC switch ON
Follow checklists

IN AIR:
• Flashes if PITOT AND STATIC switch turned OFF
• If TO has occurred with them Flashing (PITOT AND STATIC switch OFF), when WOW is off then MC illuminated steady, cancellable with Lights also Steady.
RESOLVE:
Turn PITOT AND STATIC switch ON
Follow checklists


EMER PRESS: Emergency Pressurization

Flashing if PRESS SOURCE dial set to EMER for rapid re pressurization
MC flashes, Cancelable
RESOLVE:
Move Dial to NORM when needed


ACM O’HEAT: Bleed air failure, HVAC, ACM

Flashes to indicate the Bleed Air system has failed, ACM has overheated, or HVAC system has malfunctioned and shutdown.
EMER PRESS annunciation will also illuminate.
RESOLVE:
Monitor for abnormal pressurization performance, plan landing asap.
Pressurization Gauge may be unreliable: Fly below 10000 ft. STD as a precaution
Get ground services to inspect and service Bleed Air, HVAC, and Air Cycle Machine’s and components after landing


AP PITCH MISTRIM, AP ROLL MISTRIM: See the PFD annunciation

USED in EXCEL models only
IN XL and XLS+ Models, AP PITCH and ROLL mistrim annunciations appear in the PFDs.


AHRS AUX PWR

Advisory—Steady illumination indicates the respective AHRS is powered by the auxiliary battery in the right nose compartment.
Illumination is normal during engine start with the avionics switch OFF. With the avionics switch ON, illumination indicates the AHRS has transferred to the auxiliary battery due to a malfunction (i.e., circuit breaker is out).
NOT Modeled


ENG ANTI-ICE: Engine Anti Ice

Steady illumination indicates the system is warming up.
Flashing illumination indicates the system has not warmed up properly. 4-minute and 45-second warm-up period is required before the light begins flashing.
If the system warms up but later becomes inoperative, the annunciator flashes immediately.
Causes for a flashing light include the loss of stator vane heat or the engine nacelle is too cold.
This annunciator also flashes if engine anti-ice is selected OFF and the stator vane heating valve does not close.
The engine anti-ice monitoring sensors are enabled when wing anti-ice is selected ON.
The time to get Engine Deice to operational temperature will be determined by ambient air temperatures: Anywhere from ~10 seconds to >3 1/2 minutes
RESOLVE:
PLAN AHEAD for icing conditions as the Tail anti ice system may take time to reach operational temperatures!


FUEL GAUGE: Fuel Gauge Fault

Flashes to indicate a fault is detected in the fuel gauging system.
The battery switch must be left ON after landing for light to remain illuminated.
RESOLVE:
Monitor for abnormal gauge performance, plan landing accordingly.
Get ground services to inspect and service Fuel system and components after landing.


LO FUEL LEVEL: Low Fuel Levels In Tanks

Flashes to indicate the usable fuel level in the wing fuel tank is 360 ± 20 pounds.
Limitation: The respective fuel boost pump must be turned ON
RESOLVE:
Monitor for fuel levels, plan landing accordingly.
Use CROSSFEED Selector to manage fuel imbalances, if any


EEC MANUAL

Advisory—Illuminates steady to indicate the respective electronic engine control (EEC) is in manual mode.
The EEC switch has been selected to MAN or the EEC has automatically reverted to manual


GEN OFF: Engine GEN Status

WITH ENGINES RUNNING and GEN Switches ON:
Normal: No Illumination
Flashing illumination of the L and R lights indicate a dual generator failure.
The MASTER CAUTION and MASTER WARNING lights illuminate/Horn for a dual failure.
WITH ENGINES RUNNING and 1 GEN Switches OFF, 1 ON:
The Side Off will Flash, MC Steady, Cancelable to Steady Until GEN is switched ON
WITH ENGINES RUNNING and BOTH GEN Switches OFF:
The MASTER CAUTION Steady, and MASTER WARNING lights Flash/Horn, Cancelled makes Lights Steady. Turning GEN switches back on turns lights off.
With Gens Offline, (and if no APU running) Battery power will run down.
RESOLVE:
Turn (Engine) GEN switches ON when running engines to keep Main battery charged
Follow checklists


AFT J-BOX , LMT CB

AFT J BOX—Flashes to indicate an open 225 amp current limiter in
the tail cone J Box.
AFT J BOX CB—Flashes to indicate an open 5 amp start control
circuit breaker in the tail cone J box.
Not Modeled


AC BEARING: Air Conditioner Service needed

Advisory—Illuminates steady to indicate respective alternator bearing failure impending within approximately the next 20 hours of operation.
RESOLVE:
Monitor for abnormal Cabin/Cockpit temps.
Get ground services to inspect and service HVAC system and components after landing.
In the sim, this has no bearing on the jets’ functioning, just a real-world reminder that sometimes machinery fails, and that only qualified pros in the service center on the ground can fix them. The longer your flight is, the higher probability you might (or might not) see this.
Reloading the jet will clear/reset the warning.


Rudder Bias (test)

Flashes to indicate a rudder bias system fault. The rudder bias valve is not in its commanded position.
RESOLVE:
Monitor for abnormal behavior.
Get ground services to inspect and service after landing.


FIRE EXT BOTL LOW: Used Fire Extinguisher bottle

Flashes when either engine fire extinguisher bottle pressure is low or discharged.
RESOLVE:
Get ground services to refill and service after landing.


FUEL FILTER BP: Fuel Filter

Flashes when the fuel filter is contaminated.
The filter may or may not be bypassing.
A pressure switch has detected differential across the filter.
RESOLVE:
Get ground services to inspect and service after landing.


LOW BRK PRESS: Low Brake pressure

Flashes to indicate power brake pressure is low.
The ANTISKD INOP light illuminates with all low brake pressure conditions indicating that antiskid is also inoperative.
These flashing lights and the MASTER CAUTION lights cannot be canceled during ground operations for SNs 5222 and on, or earlier SNs with SB 32-17 performed.
Not Modeled


ANTISKD INOP: Anti-Skid

Steady illumination indicates a self-test in operation or the switch is OFF.
Flashing illumination indicates the system is inoperative.
For ANTISKD illumination only, the power brakes remain operational.
Limitation: Antiskid must be operational for takeoff.
RESOLVE:
Turn Anti Skid Switch on to activate the system


STBY P/S HTR: Pitot tube heaters

Steady illumination on ground indicates the pitot-static switch is OFF.
Flashing illumination occurs if:
(1) the throttles are advanced for takeoff with the switch OFF,
(2) inflight if the switch is OFF, or
(3) the standby pitot tube or static port loses electrical current (malfunction).
RESOLVE:
Turn PITOT and STATIC Switch ON


AOA HTR FAIL: Angle of Attack

Steady illumination on ground indicates the pitot-static switch is OFF.
Flashing illumination occurs if:
(1) the throttles are advanced for takeoff with the switch OFF,
(2) inflight if the switch is OFF, or
(3) the switch is ON, ground or inflight, and the AOA vane has lost electrical current (malfunction).
RESOLVE:
Turn PITOT and STATIC Switch ON
If condition (3) Return to the Hanger and get ground services to inspect and service before flying (reload the jet).


AIR DUCT O’HEAT: Bleed air Temp

Flashes to indicate the bleed-air temperature in the respective cockpit or cabin under-floor supply duct is too high (300° or more).
Not Modeled


RADOME FAN: Radar dome area fan

Flashes to indicate a failure of the radome cooling fan.
Limitations: On-ground operations are limited to 30 minutes with dispatch into VMC only, unless an IC HOT annunciation appears
Not Modeled


TL DEICE FAIL: Tail De ice Failure

Flashes to indicate the respective horizontal stabilizer boot has not properly inflated. Possible controller failure.
RESOLVE:
Do not fly in icing conditions.
Get ground services to inspect and service after landing.


TL DEICE PRESS: TAIL De Ice operations

Switch Illuminates to indicate the respective horizontal stabilizer boot has inflated properly.
Advisory:
Single TAIL DE ICE switch in MANUAL: Illuminates L and R lights Steady
Single TAIL DE ICE switch in AUTO:
Normal operation is indicated by an cycle period: left light illuminates for 6 seconds, then right light illuminates for 6 seconds.
The cycle will repeat 3 minutes later.


FUEL XFEED: Fuel Cross Feed

Advisory—Steady illumination indicates the cross feed valve has opened after selecting CROSSFEED.
Flashing illumination indicates the cross feed valve has failed to close after CROSSFEED is selected OFF.
MC Flashes. Cancellable
RESOLVE:
Turn CROSSFEED switch to OFF (normal operations)
Read this for more on Cross Feed operations


FUEL BOOST

Steady illumination indicates the respective boost pump is receiving power.
Steady illumination occurs during normal operations to include:
(1) manual selection ON,
(2) automatic activation during engine start, or
(3) cross feed operations.
Flashing illumination occurs when the boost pump is activated because of low fuel pressure.
All automatic activations require the FUEL BOOST switch in the NORM position.
MC Flashes. Cancellable
RESOLVE:
Turn FB switches to Boost or Normal as needed
Follow checklists


LO FUEL PRESS: Fuel Pressure

Steady illumination appears before engine start.
Flashing illumination indicates low fuel pressure in the engine fuel supply line anytime after start.
MC Flashes. Cancellable
RESOLVE:
If MC is flashing, and Switches are off, and MC is NOT cancelled and N1 brought >31, then Low pressure and MC will extinguish on their own
If MC is flashing, and Switches are off, and MC IS cancelled (Both now steady) increasing N! will not extinguish lights. The FB switches must be turned on, or up to FB to cancel lights.
Follow checklists


W/S FAULT: Wind Shield Air/Defog Fault

If switch is on, steady illumination appears on ground due to the AC alternator off-line status.
Exception—On the ground and before engine start, the light begins flashing 8 seconds IF/after a controller has failed.
Flashing illumination, after engine start, indicates a windshield heat system fault (i.e., controller or alternator failure, or W/S O’HEAT).
MC Flashes. Cancellable
RESOLVE:
Turn Switch off prior to Engine start. Light will extinguish if on and engine started (assuming no controller failure)
If failure, assess whether this is a flight risk for the destination being flown, given en-route weather.


W/S O’HEAT: Windshield has overheated

Flashes to indicate the respective windshield has over-heated. This is due to high (OAT) ambient temperatures.
Windshield heat shuts down.
The system may automatically reactivate after cooling followed by another system shutdown at the overheat point (cycle on and off).
MC Flashes. Cancellable
RESOLVE:
This is a safety trip to ensure the heater does not damage the windshield! With switches off, the alert (that’s all it is) might trip if sitting on the ground in high OAT. Do not use the Windshield Heat switches when operating in OAT > 900F (320C). Turn them off to resolve. Climbing to higher, cooler altitudes will cool the windshield down, then you can turn the heater switches back on.


F/W SHUTOFF: Firewall Shutoff

Flashes to indicate the respective fuel and hydraulic firewall shutoff valves have closed and the generator field relay has tripped.
This annunciation occurs after the engine fire switchlight has been pressed.
All three conditions are required for light illumination.
MC Flashes. Cancellable
RESOLVE:
Land as soon as possible


FIRE DET SYS: Fire detection system fail

Flashes to indicate a failure in the respective engine fire detection system.
Fire detection failure can be verified with the rotary test switch.
Engine fire extinguishing remains operational.
MC Flashes. Cancellable
RESOLVE:
Land as soon as possible


ACC DOOR UNLOCKED: Door Locks

ACC DOOR UNLOCK–NOSE—Flashes to indicate one of the nose avionics doors is not properly latched.
The two bottom latches on each door are monitored (four total). NOT MODELED

TAIL — Either/Both the Baggage, or Battery compartment doors are not properly latched.
MC Flashes. Cancellable
RESOLVE:
Close battery compartment and Baggage doors


DOOR SEAL

Illuminates steady on ground with the main door open
Main Door closed: Flashing with Engines Off, and Source Selector to Not OFF. MC Flashes. Cancellable to Steady
Main Door closed: Flashing with Engines On, and Source Selector to Not OFF, Main Exit not locked. MC Flashes. Cancellable to Steady
Flashing light indicates the main door is closed, service air is available, but the primary pressure seal has not properly inflated.
The acoustic seal is not monitored.
RESOLVE:
Close and Lock Main exit/Door (verify No-Red Pin status On Door’s inside fore Locks Panel). Start both engines, Light extinguishes once pressure seal inflates


CABIN DOOR

Illuminates steady on ground with the main door open.
Door Locks Pins status On Door’s inside fore Locks Panel can be checked for improper door closure.
Red indicates not closed.
RESOLVE:
Close and Lock Main exit/Door (verify No-Red Pin status On Door’s inside fore Locks Panel).


LAV DOOR: Lavatory Door

Flashes if lavatory door is closed, or not latched closed during ground or in-flight operations
RESOLVE:
Open and Latch Lav door so that it is flush with the bulkhead.
In the unlatched position, the door is slightly ajar


BLD AIR O’HEAT: Bleed Air Overheat

Flashes to indicate bleed air exiting the pylon precooler has exceeded temperature limits (560°). Wing anti-ice on the
affected side is inoperative. Not Modeled.


CHECK PFD

CHECK PFD 1/2—Flashes to indicate there is a malfunction in the respective PFD. The IAC to PFD to IAC wrap-around function indicates a malfunction.
Limitation: The autopilot may not be used. Not Modeled.


WING O’HEAT: Wing bleed air leak

Flashes to indicate a bleed-air leak into the wing purge air passage.
The affected side wing anti-ice automatically shuts off. If wing anti-ice is in use, it reactivates when the leading edge cools (cycle ON and OFF). Wing overheat sensors are active with or without the anti-ice switches ON. Not Modeled.


WING ANTI-ICE

Blinks in AUGMENTED MODE and daytime if Icing has started accumulating while Anti Ice Systems are off.
Steady illumination, ground or inflight, indicates that wing anti-ice has been selected ON and the surface is warming up. This may be up to 4 min and 45 seconds (285 seconds!)
If systems are on, and Flashing illumination begins, this indicates the surface is too cold after the warm-up period.
If the surface reaches operating temperature, but later becomes too cold, the light flashes immediately.
The under-temperature sensors are enabled when wing anti-ice is selected ON.
RESOLVE:
PLAN AHEAD for icing conditions — Wing anti ice takes up to 285 seconds (almost 5 minutes!) before reaching operational temperatures!



STEPS TO INSTALL THE JET AFTER PURCHASE:

These steps assume you have purchased the jet from here, you have a product key, and you have downloaded the jet Package. If you have had trouble with that process, you must contact X-PLANE.ORG at sales@x-plane.orgto get to this point. Only they can help you with the pre-purchase and download-of-the-product end of the process.

Also, there is nothing special needed for those who are familiar with the process of installing aircraft into XP. Skip this section if you feel confident with that activity.

Ok, once you have the download the package onto your computer, and with XP OFF/not running (better to avoid conflicts, and get a clean load)

FIRST, please read this linked page and familiarize yourself with important License KEY information. You do not want to run out of them, and the document explains what that means and how to avoid that.
Next:

  1. Decide which computer you wish to install the aircraft to. An AirSim3D C-560XL use-license purchased from the org is for personal use on 1 machine only.
  2. The C-560XL can only be installed on the XP version it was purchased for. Please do not try installing it on another version — it will not work, AND ALSO you will have used (lost) 1 key activation count on your License each time you try to do this, and there is no refund for those wasted activations. For more information on License usage, please READ the Linked page above, and for convenience, presented here again.
  3. Look at your XP installation — in its root, you will see an AIRCRAFT directory. Click to open it. Notice (at a minimum) there will be one named Laminar Research. That is the place where all the DEFAULT aircraft that ship with XP are installed. DO NOT install the C-560XL in this default-aircraft “Laminar” directory.
  4. You may install our aircraft in the X-Plane Root, but we strongly recommend instead (just to keep things tidy) to create a new Directory under “Aircraft”, and name it what you want — maybe, MyPurchases — it does not matter what name you choose. Lets assume you create a dir named Aircraft/MyPurchases.
  5. Return to the location where you have the C-560XL Zip file you downloaded from the org store, and UNZIP that file INTO your MyPurchases directory.
  6. IF this is a first-time installation, proceed to #7
    IF you are however UPDATING an existing installation, first read the UPDATING section in the AirSim3D C-560XL INSTALLATION READ ME FIRST.txt found in the root of the aircraft.
  7. After the downlow has unzipped, notice now that you have our jet inside the MyPurchases directory.
  8. Start XP. Load one of the default aircraft, like the Baron and run it; make sure nothing wonky is happening to XP, or else reload the sim. The idea here is to first be reasonably assured that XP is up and running smoothly and with no errors with the sim itself.
  9. IMPORTANT: Next, please make sure you have a stable internet connection. The activation process REQUIRES a round trip from your machine to the activation server and will fault if its not able to do that.
  10. In the sim, go to the FLIGHT/ Flight Configuration Menu.
  11. Look for and find your new AirSim3D C-560XL aircraft button.
  12. Click its CUSTOMIZE button, and MAKE SURE that the “Start with engines running” is checked ON. Don’t worry about liveries yet or any other options at this time.
  13. When ready, click START NEW FLIGHT button. That will load the C-560XL.

    ALERT:  At this point, it is likely that you will see an FMOD “Sound bank” warning prior to seeing the Product activation box (that’s where you input your Product Key).
    It is not a bug, and this not be of any concern.
    Just ignore it by clicking “understood”, and proceed with the activation as usual.  
    This does NOT effect the sounds in the aircraft once it has been activated. 
    This is a known issue X-Plane-wide and with many aircraft, and has to do with the way the product activation process and FMOD read their files in a specific order before activation (FMOD can’t “see” the files before the activation).
    So just go “yeah, yeah, whatever, understood” and continue… you will see this only once before activating, not after.
  14. You will now see the aircraft cockpit, but nothing will work until you activate the aircraft.
  15. In this next step you will activate the aircraft, BUT BEFORE you do that, please recheck to be sure your Internet connection is stable. The activation process makes a trip out to secure servers and validates the Key you input in the next step, and without that, or if it is interrupted, the activation process MAY FAIL. The speed at which this happens depends on your internet bandwidth, typically the activation-check requires less than a minute.
  16. Enter the key you were provided at the time of purchase into the box that asks for the key. Enter it EXACTLY. Re-Check to be sure it is entered correctly and accurately.
    If you are using non-English language characters on your keyboard, please be sure that only English letters and numbers are being entered in to the ID box. Also be sure that there are no starting or ending blank spaces.
    If for some reason you are not able to enter your key — STOP. Please contact sales@x-plane.org and inform them you can not enter the key that the sale provided. Use the same email that was used to purchase the aircraft, name the aircraft, and provide them with your order number to get that resolved first before proceeding further.
  17. Click “Activate” after you have entered (and rechecked) your activation key. Then, be patient while the activation process is underway, try not to fiddle with X-Plane during that process :))
    Depending on your internet connection speed, this may take from a couple of seconds to minutes, so just please be patient and let the process run its course.
  18. If you see a red SASL activation failure message, please contact sales@x-plane.org and inform them key activation has failed. Use the same email that was used to purchase the aircraft, name the aircraft, and provide them with your order number.
  19. When you see an green Activation Success message, woo hoo!! . But wait — one last step.
  20. BEFORE you can fly the aircraft, leave the Successful Activation message as-is and then immediately and before doing anything else (with the success message still displaying), return to the sim’s FLIGHT/ Flight Configuration Menu.
  21. Proceed to choose and load one of the Default XP aircraft — the Baron is a good one that loads quickly. After it has loaded, then return to the Config menu again, and then reload the C-560XL, WITH ENGINES RUNNING.
    What this step does is that it makes sure that the C-560XL is cleanly loaded into the sim for the first time. You do not need to repeat the load-baron-first scenario once you’ve done a first flight and everything is fine. At this point all we are trying to do is to load the aircraft cleanly for the first time, just to make sure the installation went off without a hitch.
    Sometimes, (frown) 3rd party plugins do not “clean up” when they exit, and this might cause issues, and so that’s why we recommend using any default aircraft as a first startup step to ensure all is well during the aircraft load for the first time.
  22. Once the C560Xl has loaded the aircraft has successfully installed, and you should see everything working if you took our advice to start with engines running for the first step. Congratulations! You are on your way to hours of bug-free c-560XL flights.
  23. After this first go around, you DO NOT need to first load default aircraft to then load the jet as we did in 19 above … load and use the C-560XL anytime you want to fly it, just like any other aircraft.

NEXT once installed:
IF you have installed v1.5 or greater for XP12 please read its accompanying installation readme about removing all earlier versions of the jet, and other necessities. You should always only fly the latest version of the jet.
IF you are installing the latest version of the jet for the first time, (well, actually, even if you are a crack-shot pilot too) please read this section/warning/strong recommendation as you start your journey. By doing so, you will save yourself a lot of frustration since this is a study-level aircraft, it is highly replicated, and WILL require some level of reading the contents of this POH. After you have read the start up content leading up to the section marked POH Index, feel free to use your Browsers PAGE-search or FIND option to search for terms to get to the information you want quickly.
There are also Video Tutorials on our YouTube channel, but since this POH is online, is is always the latest and greatest.
We recommend start your journey by reading this chapter in this POH: HOW To Fly.
Happy Flying!!

FREQUENT CAUSES OF INSTALLATION FAILURE:
Once the C-560Xl has loaded the aircraft has successfully installed, you should see everything in the aircraft working — if you took our advice to start with engines running for the first step.
Congratulations! You are on your way to hours of bug-free c-560XL flights.

But if you see things like missing images, or no sounds, switches/levers/handles are not moving, instruments not working etc. etc., then it is possible that something in the install process failed.

  1. Corrupted aircraft download from your account. If you are absolutely convinced that none of the issues listed in #2 and below are a possibility, only then re-download the aircraft, and start from step 1 again.
  2. Incorrect product ID
  3. Unstable internet connection
  4. Not following installation steps above
  5. Operating system, or virus protection security lock down. The installation process (like any aircraft in XP) needs to create directories, and write files to the XP Aircraft installation you created in step 4
  6. Hardware issues and conflicts from the code Hardware controllers run which MAY interfere with our custom aircraft controls. The aircraft is delivered for simple joystick, single monitor setups. And MOST issues we see can be traced back to computer set-up-specific monitor layouts, peripheral setup, OS choices, and other SYSTEM issues beyond our control to test. Most often (and there are ample examples of this in our x-plane.org Support forum, “problems” with the aircraft eventually can be traced back to custom hardware or system settings. These are not things the C-560XL team can ‘fix” for you simply because every system is different. But be reassured, the VAST number of installations are issue free, and customers world wide enjoy hours of bug-free flying. So IF you do find something weird going on after the install and update, as we have said many times before, sure, you may have found a bug, no one is perfect; but first be assured that the aircraft has been EXTENSIVELY tested on Windows, Apple and Linux systems. We are happy to help try to figure our what’s going on in our x-plane.org Support forum, but please come to that table with an open mind, and not necessarily think the aircraft is full of bugs. It is not. Yes, that is confidence speaking backed you by a lot of testing, and daily flying.
  7. Account activation limits exceeded. Please open a case on our c-560XL x-plane.org Support forum .

############################################################################################
The following excerpts are provided for Flight Simulation enjoyment and reference only.

The sim model should in most instances track closely to the figures and charts provided below, however, please DO NOT expect the sim model to follow the figures listed below EXACTLY.
Please recall, the AirSim3D C-560XL is provided as-is in a best faith attempt and representation to provide an authentic aircraft experience for the flight simulator world.

Specifications and VSPEED references:
Please note, these are provided for reference only — the reference speeds in the PFD TAKE PRECEDENT since they more accurately account for inputs like airspeed, altitude, takeoff and landing configurations etc.

image.png

MANEUVERS AND PROCEDURES

Also please be sure to refer to this topic if needed: Climbing a realistic ASCENT / CLIMB profile to Cruise Altitude
And the 5 methods available to navigate to your destination

V-SPEED / VSPEEDS
DEFINITIONS
         V1 Decision speed—This speed is obtained from the performance charts in the AFM and varies with aircraft weight, engine bleeds, altitude and temperature. It must always be less than or equal to VR.
         VR Rotation speed—This speed is a function of weight and aircraft configuration. It must always be equal to or greater than V1. If V1 is greater than VR for a particular set of takeoff conditions, V1 must be lowered to equal VR.
         V2 Safety climb speed—V2 is also a function of weight and aircraft configuration. It is obtained from the performance charts in the AFM or from the abbreviated check-list. V2 gives the best angle of climb (altitude vs distance).
         VFR Flap retraction speed—Flap retracting speed (V2 + 10 knots).  Also used as minimum final segment climb speed.
         VENR Single-engine enroute climb speed—This speed can be used for a variety of purposes and is obtained from the AFM: Best single-engine rate-of-climb (altitude vs time)
         VREF Minimum final approach speed—This speed is 1.3 VSO and is the minimum speed to be used on final approach. It is the airspeed that is used for the threshold crossing speed with full flaps and landing gear extended.
         VAPP Minimum landing approach climb speed—The landing approach climb (1.3 VS1) with 15° flap position, landing gear up. Also used as minimum go-around speed.

Basic Performance
         Takeoff Distance, Sea Level, ISA, MTOW 3,560 ft 1,085 m
         Landing Distance, Sea Level, ISA, MLW 3,180 ft 969 m
         Rate of Climb – 2 Engines 3,500 ft/min 1,067 m/min
         Rate of Climb – 1 Engine 800 ft/min 244 m/min
         Typical Cruise Speeds 415 – 435 KTAS

Airspeed Limitations:
Maximum Operating Limits:
         MMO (26,515 ft / 8,082 m and above) M 0.75 Indicated
         VMO (8,000 ft to 26,515 ft / 8,082 m) 305 KIAS 565 km/hr
         VMO (Below 8,000 ft / 2,438 m) 260 KIAS 482 km/hr
         Vmcg (ground): 81 KIAS
         Vmcl (landing): 96 KIAS (w/o R.B.) 92 KIAS (w/R.B.)

Maximum Flap Speed (VFE)
         Partial Flaps – 7° & 15° 200 KIAS 371 km/hr
         Full Flaps – 35° 175 KIAS 324 km/hr
         Max LGear Operation – Extending (VLO) 250 KIAS 463 km/hr
         Max LGear Operation – Retracting (VLO) 200 KIAS 371 km/hr
         Max Landing Gear Extended Speed (VLE) 250 KIAS 463 km/hr
         Max. Speed Brake Operation Speed (VSB) No limit No limit
         Min Control Speed, Air (VMCA) 90 KIAS 167 km/hr
         Min Control Speed, Ground (VMCG) 81 KIAS 150 km/hr

Certified Weights
         Max Ramp Weight 20,400 lb 9,253 kg
         Max Takeoff Weight 20,200 lb 9,163 kg
         Max Landing Weight 18,700 lb 8,482 kg
         Max Zero Fuel Weight 15,100 lb 6,849 kg
         Max Fuel Capacity (6.7 lb/gal) 6,740 lb 3,057 kg

Basic Operating Weight
         Typically-Equipped Empty Weight 12,400 lb 5,625 kg
         Two Crew & Furnishings 400 lb 181 kg
         Basic Operating Weight 12,800 lb 5,806 kg

Payload
         Useful Payload and Fuel 7,600 lb 3,447 kg
         Maximum Payload 2,300 lb 1,043 kg
         Payload at Full Fuel 860 lb 390 kg

Operations:
         Max Operating Altitude FL450
         Max Altitude w/1-3 VG’s missing FL410
         Max Altitude for T/O and Landing 14,000 FT
         Max Temperature: ISA +39 C
         Min Temperature: -54 C
         Max Demonstrated Crosswind: 24 KTS
         Max Tailwind (T/O and landing): 10 KTS
         Min speed in icing: 160 KIAS
         Recommended Turbulent Airspeed: 180 KIAS
         Max Tire Speed: 165 KTS
         Only Approved Nose Wheel Tire: Goodrich-Michelin Part # 031-0613-8
         Tire Pressure (Mains): 218 +2/-5 psi (loaded)
         Tire Pressure (Nose): 135 +/-5 psi (loaded)

Autopilot:
         Autopilot is usable to what airspeed? — Vmo/Mmo
         AP is not available on ground
         AP is only available if TURN dial set to 3 (then TURN may be changed once AP is Engaged)
         Min Enroute Altitude to engage AP: > 1,000 ft AGL
         Disengage AP:
                  Non-precision Approach: 300 ft AGL
                  Precision Approach: 180 ft AGL
         Autopilot must be OFF for Takeoff and Landing
         With A/P ‘ON’ in flight, 1 pilot must be up front with a seat belt on

Electrical:
Max Generator Load (ground): 200 Amps (250 Amps for up to 4 minutes – Normal)
Max Generator Load (in flight): 300 Amps (450 Amps for up to 2 minutes – Emergency)
Pitot Heat Limit (ground): 2 minutes ON
Generator Start Limit: 3 starts in 30 minutes w/ 90 second rest between starts
Battery Start Limit: 3 starts per hour
Generator Assisted Start: 1/3 of a Battery Start
         *GPU Start does not count as a Battery Start
Battery—A single NiCad or Lead Acid Battery (24 Volt) is connected directly to the Battery Bus.
         *Battery can power, up to 30 minutes, to the components on the Emergency Buses during loss of both generators.
Starter-Generators—Two air-cooled, DC Starter Generators, regulated to 28.5 VDC, supply DC power during normal operations. Generators are load-sharing (+/- 10% of total load) via equalizer connection between the GCU’s.
GPU—an external power plug energizes the GPU relay which connects it direct to the Battery Bus. If battery is also connected, the battery will be charged by the GPU (28VDC, needs 800-1000 Amps to start engines).
APU—An APU provides DC power to the aircraft though its Generator (28.5 VDC).

Engines:
Two Pratt & Whitney PW545A Turbofan engines. The Bypass ratio is 4.1/1 and almost half of
the thrust is produced by the low-speed bypass air.
Thrust: 3804 lbs thrust @ T/O Power (Sea Level, Std. Day)
Max ITT (Starts/Takeoff/Continuous) 720 C
Max ITT Transient 760 C (20 seconds)
Max N1 (Takeoff/Continuous) 100%
Max N1 Transient 102% (20 seconds)
Max N2 (Takeoff/Continuous) 101.8%
Max N2 Transient 103% (20 seconds)
         *Ground Idle is available in EEC mode only
         *Flight Idle is available in EEC or manual modes
         *T/O Thrust normally limited to 5 minutes / up to 10 minutes for single engine operations

Ignition System:
Ignition is provided by one dual channel Exciter Box and two Igniters per engine. 1 igniter is sufficient for engine starting and operation.
Ignition is controlled by a 3 position switch—SEC, ON, NORM
NORM: Ignition is automatic during engine start or whenever the Engine Anti-Ice is turned on.
ON: Ignition is continuous. Use for Takeoff, Landing.
SEC: In the SEC position, ignition is continuous with power provided from the Emergency Bus. This
position must be used during Total DC power failure and the Battery Switch in EMER.

APU:
Is capable of producing DC electrical power and bleed air both on the ground and in the air.
The DC power can be used to energize all aircraft buses and systems, and the bleed air can be used for cabin temperature control.
Max Altitude Starting: 20,000 Ft
Max Altitude Running: 30,000 Ft
Max Generator Load: 200 Amps (230 Amp Transient)
         *Starting after a dual generator failure is prohibited.
         *Applying de-ice fluid is prohibited with the APU running.
         *APU is NOT approved for unattended operation.
         *APU is limited to 3 start cycles per 30 minutes, w/90 second rest periods between start cycles.
         *APU operation is prohibited until a satisfactory APU test has been accomplished.
         *Starting APU is prohibited whenever the APU FAIL light is illuminated.
         *Following shutdown, APU restart must not be attempted until 30 seconds after the RPM indicators reads 0%.
         *The battery is limited to 9 APU starts per hour (An APU battery start counts as 1/3 of a normal engine battery start.

Annunciators:
APU FIRE: APU fire detect loop has detected an overheat condition in the APU containment box. APU fire extinguishing system will discharge in approx. 8 seconds.
APU FAIL: Prior to start, Indicates either fire bottle pressure low or ECU detected fault. *Do not start APU until corrected.
Illuminated while APU was running, indicates that the APU was automatically shut down.
APU RELAY ENGAGED: Advises pilot that the APU start relay is closed.
BLEED VAL OPEN: Indicates that the APU bleed air valve is in the open position.
READY TO LOAD: Light remains illuminated after start and during operation indicating normal operation. Bleed air and generator may be loaded upon illumination of this annunciator.

Thrust Reversers:
Electrically Activated, Electrically Controlled. When deployed, T/Rs are held in the extended position by hydraulic pressure lock.
Activating EMER STOW disables the Rudder Bias System. Keep airspeed below 140 KIAS until TR is stowed.
Max Deployment time: 3 min in any 10 minute period (w/APU running 30 secs)
         *Reverse Thrust must be reduced to Idle power by 60 KIAS on roll-out
         *Static ground operation is limited to Idle power
         *Use is prohibited during Touch and Go landings
         *Use is prohibited to back the airplane
         *Use on sod or gravel runways is prohibited
         *Wet runway Takeoff (when using T/R’s for performance credit) is limited to a min runway width of 75 ft Annunciators:
ARM: Indicates isolation valve open and system pressurized
UNLOCK: Indicates TR is not fully stowed. Reverser doors are unlocked. Light on in flight triggers
Master Warning:         *Unlock light in flight, maintain 200 KIAS or below.
DEPLOY: Indicates thrust reverser is fully deployed *Reduce airspeed below 140 KIAS until stowed

Fuel System:
Fuel Capacity: 6,790 lbs / 1006 gallons
Max Fuel imbalance: 400 lbs Normal Operations (800 lbs Emergency Ops)
Approved Fuels: Jet A and Jet B (consult AFM for proper operating range)
         *AvGas is NOT an approved fuel in all PW500 series engines
         *Can be fueled single point (pressure refueling) or over-wing (gravity flow).
         *Each tank has a shutoff valve that should be checked prior to single-point fueling (directions on placard), particularly if the tanks are to be topped off.
         *Defueling can be accomplished 4 ways—Single-point, Suction, Force-draining or Transfer (cross-feed).
         *Single point is the preferred defueling method.
         *Anti-Ice additive (Prist) is approved for use; but NOT required.

Flight Controls:
The primary flight control system consists of the Aileron, Elevator & Rudder. The mechanically driven flight controls operate though input received from the cockpit via direct cable—AKA conventional cable-operated system.
There are trim tabs on the Aileron, Elevator and Rudder; the Rudder Tab is a servo tab.

Flaps:
The flaps are electrically controlled and hydraulically actuated. After the flaps have moved to the selected position, all fluid movement to or from the lines is blocked by the Flap control valve; this “hydraulically locks” the flaps into position.

Stabilizers:
The 2 position stabilizer is electrically activated and hydraulically actuated and operates in conjunction with the Flap handle.
When the flaps are up, stab is up, when flaps are down, the stab moves down (3 degrees).
The cycle time for the stabilizer to move from one position to the other is approximately 22 seconds.
A speed-sensing switch prohibits the Stabilizer from moving at airspeeds above approx. 215 KIAS.
         *If your airspeed is beyond 200 KIAS before the stab is in the up position, you will get a “STAB MIS COMP” annunciator.

Speed brakes:
The system is electrically controlled and hydraulically actuated. There is one upper and one lower panel on each wing.

Landing Gear
Is tricycle type gear consisting of a single-wheel nose gear and single-wheel, trailing link main gear.
The systems is electrically controlled and hydraulically actuated. Hydraulic pressure normally retracts and extends the landing gear.
The gear is help retracted mechanically by spring-loaded Up-locks. The Down-lock mechanism is a locking ring held in a groove on the actuator piston that can only be released with hydraulic pressure.
If the hydraulic system fails, gravity-free fall and pneumatic pressure can extend the landing gear.
         *A Squat Switch on the left Main Gear energizes a locking solenoid that keeps the gear from being
retracted while the aircraft weight is on the wheels.

A chined nose-wheel tire deflects slush and rain away from the engine intakes.
Emergency Gear Extension—A back-up pneumatic blow-down system provides gear extension if the primary system fails.
The landing gear can be extended by pulling the T-Handle and discharging the Emergency Pneumatic Bottle.
Pulling the T-Handle mechanically releases the landing gear up-locks to allow the landing gear to free-fall to the “down-and-locked”.
Pulling the red knob routes air pressure from the emergency bottle through the up-lock release actuators and on the landing gear to drive the gear actuators to the “down & locked” position.

Gear Horn: (can not be silenced)
Warning sounds if the landing gear is not down and locked, both throttles are below 70%
N2 and:
Flaps are greater than 15 degrees
A valid radio altimeter indicates an altitude less than 500 ft AGL
A non valid radio altimeter signal and the airspeed is below 150 KIAS

TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE 
14 CFR FAR 25 takeoff field lengths are shown on the following pages.
FAR 25 defines takeoff distance as the greater of accelerate-stop, accelerate-go with one engine inoperative, or 115% of the all engine takeoff distance to a point 35 feet above the runway. These factors are reflected in the takeoff field lengths presented.
Second segment climb limitations are presented at the bottom of each takeoff field length table. Second segment climb refers to the ability of the aircraft to meet certain climb rates after takeoff with one engine inoperative. Second segment climb limitations are a function of temperature, elevation, and aircraft weight.
Two flap settings are shown for the aircraft: 15° and 7°.
A flap setting of 15° is preferred to minimize runway length and runway speeds. In those situations where second segment climb requirements are too limiting for 15° of flaps, a 7° flap setting is available. A 7° flap setting requires greater runway length but provides greater second segment climb capability.
A paved, level, dry runway with zero wind is assumed. Runway lengths shown are based on the aircraft anti-ice systems being off and the cabin bleed air on.

image.png

STALL SPEEDS
Zero Angle of Bank, Landing Gear Up or Down, KCAS

image.png

RESERVE FUEL
Reserve Fuel Allowances,  Based on four passengers, ISA, zero wind.
VFR Fuel Reserves (at 15,000 feet)
Day (30 minutes) ……………………………………………………………………. 554 lb
Night (45 minutes) ………………………………………………………………….. 834 lb
IFR Fuel Reserves (Alternate plus 45 minutes at 15,000 feet))
100 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,324 lb
200 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,683 lb
300 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,935 lb
NBAA Fuel Reserves*
100 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,210 lb
200 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,564 lb
300 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,812 lb

RESERVE FUEL
Reserve Fuel Allowances,  Based on four passengers, ISA, zero wind.
VFR Fuel Reserves (at 15,000 feet)
Day (30 minutes) ……………………………………………………………………. 554 lb
Night (45 minutes) ………………………………………………………………….. 834 lb
IFR Fuel Reserves (Alternate plus 45 minutes at 15,000 feet))
100 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,324 lb
200 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,683 lb
300 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,935 lb
NBAA Fuel Reserves*
100 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,210 lb
200 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,564 lb
300 Nautical Mile Alternate…………………………………………………… 1,812 lb
         * NBAA IFR Reserves are defined as the amount of fuel for the following profile:
• A 5-minute approach at sea level
• Climb to 5,000 feet
• A 5-minute hold at 5,000 feet
• Climb to cruise altitude for the diversion to the alternate airport
• Cruise at long range cruise power
• Descend to sea level
• Land with 30 minutes of holding fuel at 5,000 feet
 

         * NBAA IFR Reserves are defined as the amount of fuel for the following profile:
• A 5-minute approach at sea level
• Climb to 5,000 feet
• A 5-minute hold at 5,000 feet
• Climb to cruise altitude for the diversion to the alternate airport
• Cruise at long range cruise power
• Descend to sea level
• Land with 30 minutes of holding fuel at 5,000 feet
 

HOLDING SPEED AND FUEL FLOW
ISA, Anti-Ice Off, Speed Brakes Retracted, Gear & Flaps Up

image.png

MISSION PLANNING

Criteria
The mission planning table (Table PER-12) provides flight time and fuel burn statistics for selected distances and altitudes.
Flight time represents the time for the climb, cruise and descent portion of the mission. No allowance has been added for taxi, takeoff, approach, or ATC procedures. Fuel burn represents the total amount of fuel consumed for taxi, climb, cruise, and descent.
There is a taxi and takeoff allowance of 135 pounds of fuel included in all fuel burn figures.
NBAA IFR fuel reserves (100 NM) are considered in each case, but are not included in the fuel burn figure.
The mission planning table reflects the cruise climb schedule of 250 knots/.65 Mach, high-speed cruise, and high-speed descent schedules. Standard day conditions are assumed with zero wind enroute.
The effects of wind can be determined from the wind correction factors shown in Table PER-11.
Apply the wind correction factor to the zero wind flight time and fuel burn to estimate the impact of wind.

image.png

WIND CORRECTION FACTORS

image.png

CLIMB PERFORMANCE
Two climb schedules are shown on the following pages: Maximum Rate Climb and Cruise Climb.
Table PER-17 shows the indicated airspeeds at various altitudes for the various climb schedules.
The Maximum Rate Climb schedule results in the minimal amount of time to reach a selected altitude. 2nd table
The Cruise Climb schedule provides a balance between forward speed and rate of climb, 3rd table
Each climb schedule is based on the climb starting at sea level. Weights represent the weight of the aircraft at the start of the climb.

CLIMB SPEEDS

image.png
image.png

250 KNOT/.62 MACH CRUISE CLIMB

image.png
image.png

DESCENT PERFORMANCE
The time distance and fuel used from a given altitude is based on descending to sea level.

TURBULENT AIR PENETRATION
Flight through severe turbulence should be avoided if possible. The following procedures are recommended for flight in severe turbulence.
1. Ignition……… ON
2. Airspeed ……. Approximately 180 KIAS (do not chase airspeed)
3. Maintain a constant attitude without chasing the altitude. Avoid sudden large control movements.
4. Operation of autopilot is recommended using basic pitch and lateral mode only.

COLD WEATHER OPERATION
Operation of the airplane has been demonstrated after prolonged exposure to ground ambient temperature of –40°C (–40°F).

This was the minimum temperature achieved in cold weather testing.

The operational procedures in this section are recommended for operations where prolonged exposure to temperatures below –10°C (+14°F) is anticipated or has occurred. 1.

1. If the aircraft has been cold soaked at temperatures below –10°C (+14°F) it is recommended the battery and crew oxygen masks be removed and stored at a temperature above –10°C (+14°F)
2. If the battery has been cold soaked at temperatures below –10°C (+14°F), battery warmup to at least –10°C (+14°F) is required. This temperature may be checked with the battery temperature gauge. Proper battery warmup may require extended application of heat to the battery. The use of engine preheat should not be required at temperatures down to –40°C (–40°F). However, it should be verified after engine start and before flight there are no visible oil leaks.
3. The avionics may require warmup after cold soak. This may require as long as 30 minutes. All avionics must be operating properly before flight as indicated by the following:
a. RAT indication stable and correct.
b. Standby Flight Display aligned and indicating correctly.
c. PFDs and MFD including air data displays indicating correctly.
d. FMS CDUs and Radio Management Units (RMUs) indicating and
operating correctly with no visible waviness or distortion.
e. Audio reception is available on all applicable avionics.
4. After 2 hours or longer exposure to ambient temperature of –10°C (+14°F) or colder, cabin temperature must be held at or above +10°C (+50°F) for a minimum of 15 minutes prior to takeoff.

This temperature ensures proper deployment and operation of the passenger oxygen masks. Cabin temperature can be determined by the CAB TEMP indicator or a handheld thermometer. This can be accomplished by taxiing the airplane to a suitable area and increasing power above idle (approximately ≥65% N2) to obtain duct supply temperatures of approximately 200°F.

Engine preheating is best accomplished by installing the engine covers and directing hot air through the oil filler access door. A heater hose can be placed in the tail cone with the door propped as far closed as possible to minimize heat loss. With sufficient hose length, the cabin and cockpit area can be warmed through the pilot’s side window.

The W/S TEMP annunciator may not test after cold soak at extremely cold temperatures. If this occurs, repeat the test after the cabin has warmed up. The test must be completed prior to flight.

If a start is attempted and the starter will not motor to 8% N2 minimum, terminate the start sequence. Advancing the throttle to idle below 8% N2 can be damaging to the engine and battery.

Battery voltage below 11 volts after the start button is pressed indicates a potential for an unsuccessful start.

Do not set the parking brake if the anticipated cold soak temperature is -15°C (5°F) or below.

Maximum heat from the air-conditioning system is obtained with the right engine operating and the PRESS SOURCE SELECT in NORM.

Switching the temperature control selector to MANUAL, and selecting MANUAL HOT for 10 seconds, ensures the temperature mixing valve is in the full hot position.

Turning on the CKPT RECIRC fan to HI will increase air circulation in the cockpit.

Operating the right engine above idle rpm increases temperature and airflow.

Utilizing APU bleed air, if equipped, will heat the interior much quicker than engine bleed on the ground. Because the airplane utilizes two separate controls for the cockpit and the cabin, comfortable temperature ranges can be obtained at both locations. Separate zone sensors for both the cockpit and cabin ensure accurate readings throughout the comfort range.

Use of MANUAL mode of the AUTO TEMP SELECT should be restricted to below 31,000 feet altitude in order to prevent possible overheating of the air cycle machine, which would result in automatic actuation of the emergency pressurization system.

Operating in extremely cold temperatures reduces the solubility and super cools any water particles in the fuel, increasing the possibility of fuel system icing.

The five tank, and one fuel filter drains under each wing should be drained frequently and thoroughly.

It is possible for water to settle in the sump and freeze, blocking the drain, in which case heat should be applied until fuel flows freely.

Maintain heat after flow begins to ensure all particles have melted and collect the drainage in a clear, clean container to inspect for water globules.

SERVICING: 

FUEL
A variety of fuels can be used in the airplane. Commercial kerosene Jet-A, Jet A-1, JET-B, JET-3, JP-4, JP-5 and JP-8 are approved fuels.
Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether (EGME) and diethylene glycol monomethyl ether (DIEGME) are approved for use but are not required.

OIL
Each engine oil tank has an oil filler neck with cap assembly and sight indicator. Oil is added to each engine directly through the filler neck and quantity is measured at the sight indicator in U.S. quarts. An accurate check of oil quantity can only be made when the engine is hot, and should be accomplished 10 minutes after engine shutdown.
BRITISH PETROLEUM 2380, CASTROL 5000, AEROSHELL TURBINE OIL 500, AEROSHELL TURBINE OIL 560, ROYCO TURBINE OIL 500, MOBIL JET OIL 254 and MOBIL JET OIL II are all approved oils. Normally different brands of oil should not be mixed; however, if oil replenishment is required, and oil of the same brand as tank contents is not available, follow procedures set forth in Section I of the Operating Manual under APPROVED OILS. The type of oil used in each airplane is noted in the engine logbook, as well as on a placard inside the filler access door.

HYDRAULIC
Servicing the main hydraulic reservoir requires equipment capable of delivering hydraulic fluid under pressure and is normally performed by maintenance personnel. The reservoir should be serviced with one of the approved fluids: SKYDROL 500 B-4, or LD-4, LD-5; or Hyjet IVA Plus only. The hydraulic brake reservoir can be serviced by removing the left nose compartment lower liner to allow access to the brake reservoir. The filler plug can then be removed and the reservoir filled to within one-half inch of the opening. The brake reservoir should be serviced with one of the approved fluids, SKYDROL 500B or equivalent.

OXYGEN
The oxygen filler valve is located just inside the access door in the right forward avionics compartment, near the aft end of the compartment. Oxygen servicing should be done by maintenance personnel using breathing oxygen conforming to MIL-O-27210, Type 1. Refer to the cockpit gauge while servicing to prevent overfill.
Oxygen pressure will vary with ambient temperature. In very cold ambient temperatures, the oxygen pressure indication may appear low, but may, in actuality, be appropriate for the temperature condition.

FIRE BOTTLES
Under-serviced fire bottles must be exchanged by authorized maintenance facilities.

LANDING GEAR AND BRAKES PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
The emergency gear and brake bottle should be serviced when the pressure gauge reads below 1,800 psi. Maintenance personnel should perform the servicing with high pressure nitrogen and refill the bottle to 2,050 psi. Servicing is accomplished through a charging valve on the bottle pressure gauge.

TIRES
Main gear tire pressures should be maintained at 210 psi and nose tire at 130 psi.
Since tire pressure will decrease as the temperature drops, a slight over inflation can be used to compensate for cold weather. Main tires inflated at 21°C should be overinflated 1.5 psi for each 6°C drop in temperature anticipated at the coldest airport of operation.
Nose tires at 21°C should be overinflated only 0.5 PSI for each 6°C anticipated drop in temperature.
Worn tires and underinflated tires both contribute to lowering the speed at which hydroplaning occurs on precipitation covered runways.

TOILET
The airplane may be equipped with either a carry out flush toilet or an externally serviceable flush toilet. Both types require servicing when the liquid level becomes too low or when the liquid appears to have incorrect chemical balance.

AIRPLANE CLEANING AND CARE
Painted Surfaces
The exterior of a new airplane is painted with a polyurethane two-component topcoat which, unlike early coatings, does not require exposure to air for complete cure to occur. The care required by the finish will not change as the paint ages.
The finish should be cleaned only by washing with clean water and mild soap, followed by rinse water and drying with a soft cloth or chamois. Minimize flying through rain, hail or sleet for a few weeks to protect the new paint.
To help prevent development of corrosion, particularly filiform corrosion, the airplane should be spray-washed at least every two or three weeks (especially in warm, damp, and salty environments) and waxed with a good grade of water repellent wax to help keep water from accumulating in skin joints and around countersinks. A heavier coating of wax on the leading edge, on the vertical tail and on the engine nose cones helps reduce abrasions encountered in these areas.

Polyurethane topcoats are designed with UV inhibitors to slow the degradation caused by exposure. The inhibitors concentrate near the surface of the coating during the initial stages of cure. Care must be taken during any buffing, polishing, or power waxing so this surface layer is disturbed only to the smallest extent necessary. However, with special care, buffing, polishing, and power waxing is acceptable. Wax products containing silicone should be avoided as they contribute to buildup of P-static, especially if the surface is well buffed to produce a shine.

DEICE BOOTS
The deice boots on the horizontal stabilizer leading edges have a special electrically- conductive coating to bleed off static charges which cause radio interference and may perforate the boots. Servicing operations should be done carefully, to avoid damaging this conductive coating or tearing the boots. To prolong the life of surface deice boots, they should be washed and serviced on a regular basis. Keep the boots clean and free from oil, grease and other solvents which cause rubber to swell and deteriorate. Clean the boots with mild soap and water, then rinse thoroughly with clean water.

ENGINES
The engine compartments should be cleaned using a suitable solvent. Most efficient cleaning is done using a spray-type cleaner. Before spray cleaning, ensure protection is afforded for other components which may be adversely affected by the solvent.

INTERIOR CARE
To remove dust and loose dirt from the upholstery, headliner and carpet, clean the interior regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Blot any spilled liquid promptly with cleansing tissue or rags. Do not pat the spot; press the blotting material firmly and hold it for several seconds. Continue blotting until no more liquid is absorbed.
Scrape off sticky materials with a dull knife, then spot clean the area.
Oily spots may be cleaned with household spot removers, used sparingly.

Before using any solvent, read the instructions on the container and test it on an obscure place on the fabric to be cleaned. Never saturate the fabric with a volatile solvent; it may damage the padding and backing material.

Soiled upholstery and carpet may be cleaned with foam-type detergent, used according to the manufacturer’s instructions. To minimize wetting the fabric, keep the foam as dry as possible and remove it with a vacuum cleaner.

The plastic trim, instrument panel and control knobs need only be wiped with a damp cloth.

Oil and grease on the control wheel and control knobs can be removed with a cloth moistened with kerosene.

Volatile solvents, such as mentioned in paragraphs on care of the windshield, must never be used since they soften and craze the plastic.

WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELDS
The glass windshields and forward (fixed) cockpit side windows, and the acrylic aft (openable) cockpit windows, and the cabin windows should be kept clean at all times.

The acrylic windows should be kept clean and waxed at all times.

To prevent scratches and crazing, wash them carefully with plenty of soap and water, using the palm of the hand to feel and dislodge dirt and mud. A soft cloth, chamois or sponge may be used, but only to carry water to the surface. Rinse thoroughly, then dry with a clean, moist chamois.

Rubbing the surface of the plastic with a dry cloth builds up an electrostatic charge which attracts dust particles in the air.

Wiping with a moist chamois will remove both the dust and this charge.

Remove oil and grease with a cloth moistened with kerosene. Never use gasoline, benzine, acetone, carbon tetrachloride, fire extinguisher fluid, lacquer thinner or glass cleaner. These materials will soften the acrylic and may cause it to craze.

After removing dirt and grease, if the surface is not badly scratched, it should be waxed with a good grade of commercial wax. The wax will fill in minor scratches and help prevent further scratching. Apply a thin, even coat of wax and bring it to a high polish by rubbing lightly with a clean, dry soft flannel cloth. If the surface is badly scratched, refer to the Airplane Maintenance Manual for approved repairs.

Do not use a canvas cover on the windshield, unless freezing rain or sleet is anticipated. Canvas covers may scratch the acrylic surface.

OXYGEN MASKS
The crew masks are permanent-type masks which contain a microphone for radio transmissions. The passenger masks are oro-nasal type which forms around the mouth and nose area. All masks can be cleaned with alcohol.

Do not allow solution to enter microphone or electrical connections.

Apply talcum powder to external surfaces of passenger mask rubber face-piece.

PERFORMANCE
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL (AFM)  PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Certification: The Model 560XL is certified under CFR Part 25, which governs the certification of transport category airplanes.
Part 25 performance requirements ensure specific single-engine climb capability throughout the flight.
Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM)
In accordance with Part 25, Airplane Flight Manual (AFM), Section IV, Performance Section, contains only single-engine takeoff and climb data. All takeoff data is based upon losing thrust on one engine at the worst possible moment—near or right at V1. The AFM contains no enroute cruise information, but does contain landing data. This data is based upon the conditions, factors and assumptions discussed below.

STANDARD PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS
All performance data in the AFM is based on flight test data and accessory losses.
1. Thrust ratings, including engine installation bleed air and accessory losses.
2. Full temperature accountability within the operational limits for which the airplane is certified.
NOTE Should ambient air temperature or altitude be below the lowest temperature or altitude shown on the performance charts, use the performance at the lowest value shown.

Flap Handle Position Flap Deflection
a. Takeoff TO 7°
b. Takeoff TO/APPR 15°
c. Enroute UP 0°
d. Approach TO/APPR 15°
e. Landing LAND 35°
3. All takeoff and landing performance data is based on a paved, dry or wet runway.
4. The takeoff performance data was obtained using the following procedures and conditions.
Single Engine Takeoff—Accelerate Go
a. Power was set static in the TO DETENT and verified to correspond to Takeoff/Go Around Thrust Settings, and then the brakes were released.
b. The pilot recognized engine failure at V1. 
c. Positive rotation to +10° was made at VR and pitch was adjusted to achieve V2 by 35 feet AGL dry runway.
d. The landing gear was retracted when a positive climb rate was established.
e. V2 was maintained from the 35-foot point above the runway to 1,500 feet AGL.
f. The airplane was accelerated to V2 +10 KIAS at which time the flaps were retracted and the acceleration continued to VENR. Power was reduced to the climb detent and the climb was continued. 
Takeoff—Accelerate Stop
a. Power was set static in the TO DETENT and verified to correspond to Takeoff/Go-Around Thrust Settings, then brakes were released.
b. The pilot recognized the necessity to stop because of engine failure or other reasons just prior to V1.
c. Maximum pilot braking effort was initiated at V1 and continued until the airplane came to a stop.
d. Both throttles were brought to idle immediately after brake application.
e. Directional control was maintained through the rudder pedals and differential braking as required.
f. Antiskid was ON during tests.
g. Speed brakes were not used.
h. Thrust reversers were not used.
i. Wet runways only, for thrust reverser credit, the thrust reverser on the operating engine was deployed immediately after the throttle reached idle. Maximum reverse thrust was selected immediately after thrust reverser deployed and was maintained to 60 KIAS, followed thereafter by idle reverse thrust until the airplane came to a stop.
Multiengine Takeoff
a. Power was set static in the TO DETENT and verified to correspond to Takeoff/Go-Around Thrust Settings then brakes were released.
b. Positive rotation to +10° was made at VR and pitch adjusted to achieve V2 +10 by 35 feet AGL.
c. The landing gear was retracted when a positive climb rate was established. Flaps were retracted at 400 feet.
5. Landing performance data was obtained using the following procedures and conditions:
Landing
a. Landing preceded by a steady 3° angle approach down to the 50-foot height point with airspeed at VREF in the landing configuration (Flaps—LAND, Gear—Extended).
b. Two-engine thrust setting during approach was selected to maintain the 3° approach angle at VREF.
c. Idle thrust was established at the 50-foot height point and the throttles remained at that setting until the airplane stopped.
d. A minimal rotation to a landing attitude was accomplished to ensure a firm touchdown on the main gear.
e. Maximum wheel braking was applied immediately on nosewheel contact and continued throughout the landing roll.
f. The antiskid system was ON during all tests.
g. Speed brakes were not used.
h. Thrust reversers were not used.

VARIABLE FACTORS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE
Details of variables affecting performance are given with tables in the AFM to which they apply. Assumptions which relate to all performance calculations, unless otherwise stated, are:
1. Cabin pressurization.
2. Anti-ice OFF.
3. Humidity corrections on thrust have been applied according to applicable regulations.
4. Wind correction information is presented on the charts in the AFM. They are taken as tower winds, 32.8 feet (10 meters) above runway surface. Factors have been applied as prescribed in the applicable regulations. In the tables, negative represents tailwind and positive represents headwind.
5. Gradient correction factors can be applied to gradients less than or equal to 2% downhill or 2% uphill. In the AFM tables, negative represents downhill gradients and positive represents uphill gradients.

CHECKLISTS TEXT:
PREFLIGHT:
1 (OUTSIDE) BATTERY – CONNECT.
2 (OUTSIDE) STAB ALIGNMENT with FLAP HANDLE – CHECK.
3 Documents, Flashlight, Extinguisher – ABOARD, SECURED.
4 Mic, Hdsets, O2 masks, Smoke Goggles- STOWED.
5 CONTROL LOCK – UNLOCKED.
6 Gear Handle – Detent-DOWN.
7 Rudder, Ail, Elev Trim: ELEV: Takeoff zone, AIL/RUD neutral.
8 GEN Switches – OFF (OFF, if GPU for Start).
9 All other switches – OFF/NORM/AUTO.
10 Throttles – in CUT OFF.
11 BATT Switch – ON (check 22 v min., or use APU/GPU power)
12 AVIONICS Switch – ON
13 Oxygen Quantity – CHECK in green arc.
14 Fuel Quantity and Balance – CHECK.
15 EXT/INT/EMER Lights – AS REQUIRED.
16 BATT Switch – EMER; CHECK EmerInstru: ENG Left Panel,
GEAR, P-CLOCK, DC, StandBy HSI, AH, COM, have power. OFF

COCKPIT PREPARATION AFTER PREFLIGHT COMPLETED
1 Oxygen – CHECK. PASS OXY VALVE – AUTO
2 Crew Oxygen Masks – CHECK, SET 100%.
3 Circuit Breakers – CHECK ALL IN
4 Cockpit Switches – SET
a. DC POWER – BATTERY – ON (22 volts minimum)
b. AVIONICS – ON Check all power.
c. LH and RH Microphone Switch – MIC HEADSET.
d. Fuel CROSSFEED – OFF.
e. FUEL BOOST Pumps – NORM.
f. IGNITION Switches – NORM.
g. GEN Switches – OFF.
h. EEC – AUTO.
i. DAY/NIGHT Switch – AS REQUIRED.
j. AHRS 1 and 2 – SLAVE
k. STBY PWR – TEST, verify green light, then ON.
l. ANTISKID – ON.
m. WING/ENGINE Anti-Ice/De-Ice – OFF.
n. WINDSHIELD Anti-Ice – BOTH ON.
o. WING INSPECT / TAIL FLOOD Lights – OFF.
p. PRESS SYSTEM SELECT Switch – AUTO.
q. EMER DUMP – OFF.
r. PRESS SOURCE Select Knob – NORM.
s. CKPT & CAB Temps – SET AS DESIRED.
t. ENGINE SYNC – OFF.
u. PULSE/LAND/TAXI/NAV/REC/COLL LIGHTS OFF.
v. CKPT RECIRC Fan – AS DESIRED.
5 SPEEDBRAKE – check retract.
6 EMER LTS – ARM.
7 PASS SAFETY – ON.
8 Engine Instruments – NO FLAGS.
9 Gear Position Indicator – 3 GREEN LIGHTS.
10 Warning Systems TEST Rotary Switch – RUN CHECK/OFF.
11 Pitch Trim – CHECK/SET for Takeoff

APU
APU GROUND OR IN-FLIGHT STARTING
DO NOT RUN GPU and APU GENs TOGETHER
1 BATT Switch – ON (BATT or GPU start).
2 APU MASTER Switch – ON.
3 APU FAIL Light – VERIFY OFF.
4 APU Test Button – PUSH, verify:
a. Fire warning light illuminated.
b. APU FAIL light illuminated.
c. APU RELAY ENGAGE light illuminated.
d. BLEED VAL OPEN light illuminated.
e. READY TO LOAD light illuminated.
f. APU GEN OFF light illuminated.
g. The EGT indicator: 500°C ± 10°.
h. The RPM indicator: 50 ± 5% RPM.
5 APU Generator – OFF.
6 APU BLEED AIR Valve Switch – OFF.
7 APU START/STOP Switch – START POSITION (momentarily).
8 APU RELAY ENGAGE Light – ON.
9 READY TO LOAD Light – ILLUMINATED (start is complete).
10 APU Generator – AS DESIRED.
11 APU Ammeter – CHECK.
(200 AmpsMaxGround; 230 AmpsMaxFlight).
12 APU BLEED AIR Valve Switch – AS DESIRED.

APU SHUTDOWN (GROUND OR IN-FLIGHT)
1 APU BLEED AIR Valve Switch – OFF.
2 APU Generator – OFF.
3 APU RELAY ENGAGE Annunciator – VERIFY OFF.
4 BLEED VAL OPEN Light – VERIFY OFF.
5 APU START/STOP Switch – STOP POSITION (momentarily).
6 READY TO LOAD Light – VERIFY OFF.
7 APU MASTER Switch – OFF, after RPM indicates 0% RPM.

STARTING
BEFORE STARTING ENGINES
1 Passenger Briefing – COMPLETED.
2 BATT Switch – ON (verify 22 volts minimum).
3 GEN L & R Switches – OFF.
4 EMER LTS – ARM.
5 PARK BRAKE – SET.
6 Cabin Door – CLOSE/LOCK, pin indicators green, handle up.
7 FLOOD Lights – FULL BRIGHT (night only).
8 STBY PWR – ON.
9 WING INSP / TAIL FLOOD Lights – AS REQUIRED.
10 VOICE RECORDER – TEST. MICROPHONE on, ERASE – OFF
11 GND REC Lights – ON.
12 NAV Lights – ON (during night operations).
13 Annunciators – CHECK.

STARTING ENGINES (WITH APU GENERATOR ONLINE)
1 GEN Switches – OFF (OFF if GPU start).
2 APU Generator – ON (OFF if GPU start).
3 APU Bleed Air – OFF or ON.
4 Either Engine – START (STARTING ENGINES checklist).

STARTING ENGINES – Either engine may be first.
1 FUEL BOOST – ON.
2 IGNITION – NORM or ON.
3 ENGINE START – PUSH. At 50% N2, THROTTLE to IDLE.
4 Abort if rapid ITT temp to 740°C or no ITT temp >30Sec
5 Abort if no indication of N1 rotation by 25% N2.
6 Engine Instruments – CHECK NORMAL.
7 Fuel, Oil, Gen and Hyd Annunciators – EXTINGUISHED.

#2 Engine START. Repeat procedures 1 – 7 above
a. #1 Operating engine IDLE for CROSS GEN START.
8 Engine Annunciators – EXTINGUISHED (except GND IDLE).
9 GPU – DISCONNECTED (if used).
10 GEN Switch – ON/CHECK DC AMPS/VOLTS.
11 L GEN – OFF, R GEN – GEN: Check L GEN V, R GEN AMPS.
12 L GEN – GEN, R GEN – OFF: Check L GEN AMPS, R GEN V.
13 L GEN – GEN, R GEN – GEN: Check both GEN AMPS, sys V.

TAXI
BEFORE TAXI
1 AVIONIC POWER – ON.
2 Flight Controls/Speed Brake/Flaps – CHECK/SET.
3 Rudder Bias System Check.
a. Advance left throttle to approximately 60% N1.
b. Verify left rudder pedal moves forward.
c. Return left throttle to idle.
d. REPEAT with right throttle and right rudder pedal.
4 Anti-Ice/Deice – CHECK/SET AS REQUIRED.
5 ECS – AS REQUIRED.
6 PRESSURIZATION Controller – SET Landing Altitude Pressure.
7 COMM Panel – CHECK.
8 FUEL BOOST – NORMAL
9 REAL or AUGM panel – CHECK
10 Flight Plan/ATIS/Clearance/- AS REQUIRED.
11 Avionics/Flight Instruments – SET as:
a. EFIS test switch – Push, verify:
(1) Pilot/Copilot radio alt display 100 ±10 feet.
(2) Red X displayed in alt, speed, wind.
(3) All digits replaced with dashes (except vvi, radio alt).
(4) TEST messages displayed down PFD centerline.
b. Engine Instruments – CHECK NORMAL .
c. Radio Altimeter; MINIMUMS – SET.
d Communication Frequencies – SET.
e. Navigation Frequencies – SET.
f. Course – SET.
g. Autopilot (Pilot discretion) – verify disconnects.
h. Speed Bug and Takeoff N1 Bug – SET.
12 Lavatory Door – LATCHED OPEN.
13 Annunciator Panel – CHECK.
14 ANTISKID – ON.
15 TAIL FLOOD – as desired.

TAXI
1 Taxi path – CLEAR.
2 Passenger Safety Switch – PASS SAFETY ON.
3 External Lights – AS REQUIRED.
4 Brakes – CHECK.
5 Steering – CHECK.
6 Thrust Reversers – CHECK.
a. Deploy Thrust Rev, check sequencing and light timing.
b. Verify RUDDER BIAS Caution does not illuminate.
c. Select EMER STOW, check sequencing and light timing.
d. Stow Thrust Reversers, check sequencing and light timing.
e. Deselect EMER STOW, verify all Thrust Rev lights extinguish.
7 Set Flaps – 70 (Takeoff position).
8 Takeoff Speeds – CONFIRM V1, R, V2, E displayed on PFD.
9 Taxi Lights – ON.
10 AP Panel CHECK; TURN to 3 – SET
11 Fuel imbalance CHECK; Equalize before TO with X-FEED.

TAKEOFF
BEFORE TAKEOFF
1 Flaps in Takeoff position – CONFIRM.
2 Speed Brake – RETRACTED.
3 Trims (3) – SET.
4 Anti-Ice/Deice – AS REQUIRED.
5 Windows – CLOSED and LOCKED.
6 Crew Briefing – COMPLETE.

CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
7 IGNITION Switches – ON.
8 PITOT & STATIC Heat – ON.
9 Exterior Lights – AS REQUIRED.
10 Transponder/TCAS – ON/TA/RA.
11 Engine instruments – CHECK NORMAL.
12 Annunciator Panel – CHECK OFF except ground idle.
13 Taxi Lights – OFF; Landing or Pulse Lights ON – CHECK.

TAKEOFF
1 Throttles – TO DETENT, Check TO N1’s.
2 Engine instruments – CHECK NORMAL.
3 Brakes – RELEASE.

CLIMB
AFTER TAKEOFF – CLIMB
1 Brake to stop wheel spin.
2 Landing Gear – UP.
3 Flaps – UP.
4 Throttles – CLB DETENT, Check CLB N1’s.
5 ENGINE SYNC – AS REQUIRED.
6 Yaw Damper – ENGAGE.
7 IGNITION Switches – NORM. (ON in heavy rain).
8 Passenger Safety Switch – AS REQUIRED.
9 Pressurization – CHECK.
10 Altimeters – SET (transition altitude).
11 REC Lights – OFF (transition altitude).
12 Anti-Ice/Deice – AS REQUIRED.
13 APU – SHUTDOWN (prior to FL300).

CRUISE
1 Throttles – CRU DETENT or AS DESIRED.
2 Pressurization – CHECK.
3 Anti-Ice/Deice – AS REQUIRED.
4 Ignition switches ON in heavy rain.
5 Fuel CROSSFEED – AS REQUIRED max imbalance 400lbs/181Kg

DESCENT
1 WINDSHIELD Anti-Ice – BOTH ON.
2 Anti-Ice/Deice – AS REQUIRED. Maintain power to extinguish lights.
3 IGNITION Switches – ON, when flying through heavy rain.
4 Pressurization – CHECK/SET Landing Pressure Altitude.
5 APU – START (if desired below FL200).
6 REC Lights – ON (transition altitude).
7 Altimeter – SET (transition altitude).

APPROACH
1 Avionics/Flight Instruments – CHECK/SET.
2 Crew Briefing – COMPLETE.
3 Landing Speeds – SET.
4 Go-Around N1 – SET.
5 Passenger Safety Switch – PASS SAFETY ON.
6 Passengers – BRIEF.
7 LAV DOOR annunciator OFF.
5 Flaps – AS REQUIRED (below 200 KIAS – 7°/15°).
6 IGNITION Switches – ON.
7 Exterior Lights – AS REQUIRED.
8 Fuel CROSSFEED – OFF.
9 ENGINE SYNC – OFF.
10 Annunciator Panel – CHECK.
11 Pressurization – CHECK ZERO DIFF PRIOR TO LANDING.

BEFORE LANDING
1 Landing Gear – DOWN and LOCKED (VLE 250 KIAS).
2 Flaps – LAND (below 175 KIAS – 35°).
3 Speed Brake – RETRACT (above 50 feet AGL).
4 Airspeed – VREF Minimum.
5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper – OFF (at appropriate alt limits).

TOGA
ALL ENGINE GO-AROUND
1 Throttles – TOGA Button IN.
2 Pitch – VERIFY +10 degree ROTATION; Wings level.
3 Flaps – T.O. and APPR (15°).
4 Climb Speed – VAPP.
5 Landing Gear – UP (positive rate-of-climb).
6 Flaps – UP (above 400 feet AGL).
7 Throttles – CLB DETENT, Check CLB N1’s or AS REQUIRED.

LANDING
ON LANDING
1 Throttles – IDLE.
NOTE
NO TAKEOFF Caution illuminates on landing with flaps 35°.
2 Brakes – APPLY (after touchdown).
3 Speed Brake – EXTEND (after touchdown).
4 Thrust Reversers – DEPLOY (after nosewheel on ground).
CAUTION
a. DO NOT ADVANCE THROTTLES UNTIL THE
THRUST REVERSER DEPLOY LIGHTS ARE ON.
b. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO STOW REVERSERS
AND TAKE OFF ONCE REVERSERS HAVE
STARTED TO DEPLOY.
5 Thrust Reverser Indicator Lights – CHECK
a. ILLUMINATION OF ARM LIGHTS.
b. ILLUMINATION OF UNLOCK LIGHTS.
c. ILLUMINATION OF DEPLOY LIGHTS.
6 Reverse Power – AS REQUIRED.
(do not exceed 75% takeoff thrust).
7 Thrust Reversers – REV LEVERS TO IDLE AT 60 KIAS.

AFTER LANDING
1 Thrust Reverser Levers – STOW.
CAUTION
DO NOT ADVANCE THROTTLES UNTIL ALL 3
THRUST REVERSER STATUS LIGHTS ARE OUT.
2 Speed Brake – RETRACT.
3 Flaps – UP.
4 IGNITION Switches – NORM.
5 Transponder/TCAS – STANDBY.
6 PITOT & STATIC Heat – OFF.
7 Anti-Ice/Deice – WING and TAIL OFF, ENGINE as required.
8 Exterior Lights – AS REQUIRED.
a. ANTI-COLL Lights – OFF.
b. REC/TAXI, PULSE Lights – AS REQUIRED.

SHUT DOWN
1 PARK BRAKE – SET.
2 CONTROL LOCK – LOCK.
3 ALL Anti-Ice Systems – WING, ENG, WINDSHIELD – OFF.
4 Throttles – CUT OFF.
5 L GEN and R GEN – OFF.
6 Passenger Safety Switch – OFF
7 Exterior Lights – OFF.
8 EMER LTS – OFF.
9 AVIONICS POWER – OFF.
10 APU Shutdown.
a. APU BLEED AIR Valve Switch – OFF.
b. APU Generator – OFF.
c. APU RELAY ENGAGE Annunciator – VERIFY OFF.
d. BLEED VAL OPEN Light – VERIFY OFF.
e. APU START/STOP Switch – STOP (momentarily).
f. READY TO LOAD Light – VERIFY OFF.
g. APU MASTER Switch – OFF, after RPM indicates 0% RPM.
11 CKPT RECIRC Fan Switch – OFF.
12 BATT Switch – OFF. (OUTSIDE) Disconnect Battery as needed.

1 PARK BRAKE – SET.
2 CONTROL LOCK – LOCK.
3 ALL Anti-Ice Systems – WING, ENG, WINDSHIELD – OFF.
4 Throttles – CUT OFF.
5 L GEN and R GEN – OFF.
6 Passenger Safety Switch – OFF
7 Exterior Lights – OFF.
8 EMER LTS – OFF.
9 AVIONICS POWER – OFF.
10 APU Shutdown.
a. APU BLEED AIR Valve Switch – OFF.
b. APU Generator – OFF.
c. APU RELAY ENGAGE Annunciator – VERIFY OFF.
d. BLEED VAL OPEN Light – VERIFY OFF.
e. APU START/STOP Switch – STOP (momentarily).
f. READY TO LOAD Light – VERIFY OFF.
g. APU MASTER Switch – OFF, after RPM indicates 0% RPM.
11 CKPT RECIRC Fan Switch – OFF.
12 BATT Switch – OFF. (OUTSIDE) Disconnect Battery as needed.

DEFINITIONS

Accelerate-Stop Distance—The distance required to accelerate to V1 and abort the takeoff and come to a complete stop with maximum braking applied at V1.

Airport Barometric Altitude—Indicated altitude with altimeter set to airport altimeter setting while at airport elevation.

Altitude—All altitudes used in the AFM are pressure altitudes unless otherwise stated.

Anti-ice Systems—The following systems comprise the anti-ice systems which affect performance in the AFM:

1. Engine Anti-ice.
2. Wing Anti-ice. Performance, when referred to ANTI-ICE ON, is based on all systems being operated at the same time.
The pitot-static and angle-of-attack anti-ice system and horizontal tail deice do not affect performance.

Calibrated Airspeed (KCAS)—Indicated airspeed (knots) corrected for position error and assumes zero instrument error.
Cat II—Category II operation. A straight-in ILS approach to the runway of an airport under Category II ILS instrument approach procedure.

Climb Gradient—The ratio of the change in height during a portion of a climb to the horizontal distance traversed in the same time interval (gradient = rise over run).

Deice Systems—The horizontal stabilizer boots are the only deice system.

Demonstrated Crosswind—The demonstrated crosswind velocity of 24 knots (measured at 10 meters above runway surface) is the velocity of the crosswind component for which adequate control of the airplane during takeoff and landing was actually demonstrated during certification tests. This is not limiting.

Engine Out Accelerate-Go Distance—The horizontal distance from brake release to the point at which the airplane attains a height of 35 feet above the runway surface “dry” or 15 feet “wet” (reference zero), on a takeoff during which an engine is recognized to have failed at V1 and the takeoff continued.

Gross Takeoff Flight Path—The takeoff flightpath that the airplane can actually achieve under ideal conditions.

Gross Climb Gradient—The climb gradient that the airplane can actually achieve with ideal ambient conditions (smooth air).

Indicated Airspeed (KIAS)—Airspeed indicator reading (knots). Zero instrument error is assumed.

Indicated Mach Number—The displayed Mach number value includes position error.

ISA—International Standard Atmosphere; +15°C SL (standard), subtract 2° per thousand feet altitude increase.

Landing Distance—The distance from a point 50 feet above the runway surface to the point at which the airplane comes to a full stop on the runway.

Landing Field Length—Landing distance adjusted for operational factors.

Level Off Altitude—The barometric altitude at which second segment climb ends.

Mach Number—The ratio of true airspeed to the speed of sound.

Net Climb Gradient—The gross climb gradient reduced by 0.8% during the takeoff phase and 1.1% during enroute. This conservatism is required by special clearance determinations to account for variables encountered in service.

Net Takeoff Flightpath—Takeoff flightpath used to determine obstacle clearance. Uses net climb gradients to climb to a height of 1,500 feet above the runway surface.

OAT—Outside Air Temperature or Ambient Air Temperature. The free air static temperature obtained either from ground meteorological sources or from in-flight temperature indications, adjusted for instrument error and compressibility effects. Used interchangeably with Temperature.

Position Correction—A correction applied to indicated airspeed or altitude to eliminate the effect of the location of the static pressure source on the instrument reading. No position corrections are required when using performance section charts in Section IV of the AFM, since all airspeeds and altitudes in Section IV are presented as “indicated” values, except for stall speeds which are presented as “calibrated” values.

RAT—Ram Air Temperature. Indicated outside air temperature as read from the RAT display. This must be corrected for ram air temperature rise to obtain true outside air temperature, (subtract ram air temperature rise from RAT display to obtain true air temperature).

Reference Zero—The point in the takeoff flight path at which the airplane is 35 feet (dry runway) or 15 feet (wet runway) above the takeoff surface and at the end of the takeoff distance required. Residual Ice—That ice which is not completely removed from the leading edge stagnation areas of the wing and horizontal stabilizer by the surface anti-ice/ deice systems during operation in icing conditions.

Takeoff Climb Increment (TCI)—Altitude increment to be added to the airport barometric altitude to obtain level-off altitude. This increment includes corrections for nonstandard temperature.

Takeoff Field Length—The takeoff field length given for each combination of gross weight, ambient temperature, altitude, wind, and runway gradients is the greatest of the following:
1. 115% of the two-engine horizontal takeoff distance from start (static) to a height of 35 feet above the runway surface.
2. Accelerate-stop distance, wet or dry runway, as appropriate.
3. The engine-out accelerate-go distance to 35 feet for dry runways and 15 feet for wet runways. No specific identification is made on the charts concerning which of these distances governs a specific case.

True Airspeed (KTAS)—The airspeed (knots) of an airplane relative to undisturbed air.

True Mach Number—The displayed Mach with position error removed.

V1—Takeoff Decision Speed. The distance to continue the takeoff to 35 feet (dry runway) or 15 feet (wet runway) will not exceed the scheduled takeoff field length if recognition occurred at V1 (accelerate-go). The distance to bring the airplane to a full stop (accelerate-stop) will not exceed the scheduled takeoff field length provided that maximum brakes are applied at V1.

V2—Takeoff Safety Speed. The climb speed is the actual speed at 35 feet above the runway surface as demonstrated in flight during takeoff with one engine inoperative.

V35—Actual speed at 35 feet above the runway surface as demonstrated in flight during takeoff with both engines operating.

VA—Maximum Maneuvering Speed. The maximum speed at which application of full available aerodynamic control will not overstress the airplane.

VA speed is a function of weight versus altitude.

VAPP—Landing approach airspeed (1.3 VS1) with 15° flap position, landing gear up.

VENR—Single-engine enroute climb speed (VYSE) or best rate-of-climb single- engine. The aircraft uses one reference speed, 160 KIAS at all weights.

VFE—Maximum Flap Extended Speed. The highest speed permissible with wing flaps in a prescribed extended position.

VLE—Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed. The maximum speed at which an airplane can be safely flown with the landing gear extended.

VLO—(Extension). Maximum Landing Gear Extension Speed. The maximum speed at which the landing gear can be safely extended.

VLO—(Retraction). Maximum Landing Gear Retracting Speed. The maximum speed at which the landing gear can be safely retracted.

VMCA—Minimum airspeed in the air in the takeoff configuration at which directional control can be maintained when one engine is suddenly made inoperative.

VMCA is a function of engine thrust which varies with altitude and temperature.

The VMCA of 90 KIAS was determined at maximum takeoff thrust and maximum takeoff weight.

VMCG—Minimum speed on the ground in the takeoff configuration at which directional control can be maintained when one engine is suddenly made inoperative, using only aerodynamic controls.

VMCG is a function of both airplane weight and engine thrust which varies with altitude and temperature. AC configuration airplanes,

VMCG is 91 KIAS and was determined for maximum takeoff thrust.

VMCL—Minimum airspeed in the air, in the landing configuration, at which directional control can be maintained, when one engine is suddenly made inoperative.

VMCL is a function of engine thrust which varies with altitude and temperature.

VMCL of 92 KIAS was determined at maximum takeoff thrust and maximum landing weight.

VMO/MMO—Maximum Operating Limit Speed.

VR—The speed at which rotation is initiated during takeoff to attain

V2 climb speed at or before a height of 35 feet above the runway surface has been reached.

VREF—The airspeed equal to the landing 50-foot point speed (1.3 VSO) with full flaps and landing gear extended.

VSB—Maximum operating speed with speed brakes in the extended position.

VSO—The stalling speed or the minimum steady flight speed in the landing configuration.

VS1—The stalling speed or the minimum steady flight speed obtained in a specified configuration.

Visible Moisture—Visible moisture includes but is not limited to, the following conditions: fog with visibility less than one mile, wet snow and rain.

Wet Runway—A runway is considered wet when there is sufficient moisture on the surface to appear reflective, but without significant areas of standing water.

Wind—The wind velocities recorded as variables on the charts to be understood as the headwind or tailwind components of the actual winds at 32.8 feet (10 meters) above the runway surface (tower winds).

image.png
image.png

Copyright 2022 — AirSim3D All rights reserved.

Scroll to Top